JP6508753B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when the player rotates the operation handle in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate, the ball launch device causes the game ball to play the game board with a strength according to the rotation angle of the operation handle. Driven into the area. Then, when the game ball driven into the game area enters the start opening, a lottery such as a big hit game is performed, and when the lottery is won, the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times, so a large amount of players The opportunity to win the game ball is given.

  In conventional pachinko machines, various ideas have been proposed for assisting the player's game, such as making the operating handle for firing the game ball easy for the player to operate. As one of them, for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-125372 exists.

JP, 2009-125372, A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a risk that the gaming ball may be caught between the outer frame and the main frame when the game medium is spilled. Then, this invention aims at reducing that a game ball is pinched | interposed between an outer frame and a main body frame .

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is an gaming machine including an outer frame and a main frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is performed using a game medium, wherein the outer frame is A lower member provided at the lower part and including a curtain plate on which the main body frame is placed with the main body frame closed with respect to the outer frame, and provided on the left side of the outer frame to open and close the main body frame The game ball discharge area for discharging the game ball on the rear surface side of the curtain plate is provided at a position retracted backward on the side on which the hinge member is provided. And an upright wall portion formed laterally long including the rear of the game ball discharge area, and the upper end of the upright wall portion at a position retracted backward on the side provided with the hinge member is the main body of the curtain plate Of the portion on which the frame is placed, the standing wall portion is retracted backward Set higher than the upper end of the portion that does not exist in the location, on the side of the game balls discharged areas, game so as not game balls sandwiched between the body frame and the vertical wall portion when said body frame is closed There is provided a flat plate portion into which balls are fed, and a game ball can be guided along the standing wall portion from the flat plate portion to the gaming ball discharge area, and a return portion extending forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion Are provided.

According to the present invention, it can be reduced that the game ball is caught between the outer frame and the main frame .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted the left frame member and looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from lower side, (b) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). . (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). (A) is an explanatory view shown in a state in which the main frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide vane at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member, and (b) in the embodiment of (a) It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame, and (c) is provided with the guide blade of embodiment different from (a) and (b), and shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame. It is explanatory drawing and (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c). It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the saucer unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit of a plate unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mounting base unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the touch unit and was seen from the bottom. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the button unit and was seen from the bottom. It is a top view of a saucer unit. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the BB cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a rendering operation unit in the CC cross section in FIG. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rendering unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right rendering unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right rendering unit from the back. It is DD sectional drawing in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG.43 (b). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door lower right rendering unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary body internal unit and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the upper countersinking unit of the countersink unit is attached to the countersink unit base, (b) is from behind with the upper countersink retractor mounted on the countersink unit base It is the seen perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper countersinking unit, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit of a disc unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower disc ball extraction unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a payout device, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line E-E in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the delivery blade | wing in a delivery apparatus. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. Fig. 76 is an explanatory view showing a guideway opening / closing door having a form different from Figs. 76 to 80; It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front component and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front component and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front surface unit from the front upper side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the attacker unit as viewed from the front upper side, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear upper side, (c) is a perspective view as viewed from the rear lower side FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of a front unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back up movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up movable presentation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up movable presentation unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back top decoration unit of the back top movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up decoration unit of the back up movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back upper decoration in a back up movable decoration unit. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back up decoration unit of the back up movable effect unit is at the retracted position. It is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back up decoration unit of the back up movable effect unit is at the first appearance position. It is a front view which shows the state of an internal mechanism in case the back up decoration unit of a back up movable presentation unit is a 2nd appearance position. (A) is a front view which shows a part of internal mechanism of a back up movable presentation unit, (b) is the perspective view which looked at a part different from (a) in an internal mechanism from the front, (c) Is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. It is an explanatory view showing a part of movement of an internal mechanism of a back up movable production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the main member which comprises the internal mechanism in a retracted position, (b) is a state of (a), and the 1st transmission member rotates and it is to a 1st to-be-transmitted member It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the transmission of rotation of was started. FIG. 113 (c) shows that the first transmission member is further rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 113 (b) and the back upper decoration unit is lowered from the retracted position toward the first appearance position (D) is a state of (c), the first receiving member is further rotated together with the first transmitting member, transmission of the rotation to the first receiving member is completed, and the back top decoration unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which reached one appearance position. (E) is a state in which the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism which has been rotated together with the first transmission member in the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated and transmission of the rotation to the second receiving member is started (F) is the second transmission member and the second transmission member rotate from the state of (e), and the back top decoration unit descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position It is explanatory drawing which shows the state currently rotated ,. (G) is a state in which the second upper transmission member is rotated together with the second transmission member from the state of (f) in FIG. 115, and the back upper decoration unit is further rotated toward the second appearance position. It is an explanatory view shown, (h) is the second transmission member further rotating with the second transmission member from the state of (g), transmission of the rotation to the second transmission member is finished, and the back top decoration unit is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which half-rotated while falling from the state of a 1st appearance position, and reached the 2nd appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front movable presentation unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a back lower front first decorative body and a back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit from the front in a state of a normal retraction position, and (b) is a back lower front It is an explanatory view showing the back bottom front first decoration body and the back bottom front second decoration body of the movable effect unit from the front in the state of the appearance position. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back right movable presentation unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration directed to the front, and (b) is an open shutter of the back right rotation decoration in (a) (C) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit with the second decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front, (c) ) Is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back left movable presentation unit of the back unit from the back. (A) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the first decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration directed to the front, and (b) is a front view of the second decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration (C) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing the third decorative surface of the back left rotary decorative body facing the front, and (c) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown in a facing state; d) is a front view of a back left movable effect unit showing a state in which the back left protruding decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG. 122 (a). (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back movable back production unit of a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable movable production unit of the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back bottom back movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the back bottom back movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from a front the state of the raising / lowering unit in case a back bottom back rotation decoration unit is a fall end position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the raising / lowering unit at the time of a back end back rotation decoration unit in a raising end position from a front. (A) is a front view of a back-to-back movable effect unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back-to-back movable decorative unit seen from the front, and (c) is a back-to-back It is the perspective view which looked at the back decoration of a back movable presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back and bottom back rotation decoration unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back and bottom back rotation decoration unit, and was seen from back. FIG. 129 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. (A) is a front view showing a state where the back decoration of the back decoration of the back rotation decoration unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a back view of the rotation decoration body in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which is rotating, (c) is a front view which shows the state just before rotating in the direction of a front view clockwise rotation which a rotating decoration body opens back and back, (d) is a back lower It is a front view which shows the state which the back rotation decoration body is rotating to the direction of a clockwise view from a front view. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the drive mechanism which concerns on a back bottom back rotation drive motor in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit, (b) is a differential mechanism which concerns on a rotation damper in a back bottom back rotation decoration body unit (C) shows the configuration of the connection mechanism connecting the drive mechanism for the back and back rotation drive motor and the differential mechanism for the rotation damper in the back and back rotation decoration unit FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and rotation is stopped, and (b) is a rotation of the back decoration in the counterclockwise direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism at the time of. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and the rotation is stopped, and (b) is a case where the connection ring of the drive mechanism rotates in the clockwise direction and the back It is an explanatory view showing the state of the connecting mechanism when the lower back rotating decorative body is opening, (c) is further rotating the connecting ring of the drive mechanism in the clockwise direction and the back down rotating decorative body is completely It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when it opens, (d) is a connection mechanism when the back decoration in the open state is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of the drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a state. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corner movable presentation unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back four corners movable presentation unit of the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in back four corners movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corner 1st unit in back four corners movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corners 2nd unit in back four corners movable presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back four corners 2nd unit in back four corners movable presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable presentation unit in the state of the normal retraction position, (b) is the back four corner first in the state of the appearance four back corner first decorative body It is a front view of a unit, and (c) is a front view of a back four corner 1st unit in the state of a back four corner second decoration body appearance position. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner first decoration body is in a retreat position in the back four corner first unit, and (b) is the back four corner first in the back four corner first unit It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism on the way from the retracted position to the emergence position from the left side, and (c) shows the drive mechanism when the back four corner first ornament is in the appearance position in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of from the left side. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decoration is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit from the left side, and (b) is a back four corner second unit in the back four corner first unit It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism on the way from the retracted position to the appearance position from the retreat position from the left side, and (c) shows the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decoration appears in the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of from the left side. It is a front view of the game board which shows the motion of the front movable decoration of the front movable presentation unit in a center character. It is a front view of the game board in which the back decoration body of the back up movable presentation unit in the back unit shows the state of the first appearance position. The state where the back top decoration of the back top movable effect unit in the back unit is the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decoration and the back bottom second decoration of the back bottom front movable effect unit are in the appearance position Is a front view of the game board showing. A pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decoration of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decoration of the back left movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left projecting decorative body with the surface directed to the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective third decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is rotating in the direction of front view counterclockwise in the back end back rotation decoration body of a back bottom back movable presentation unit in a back unit at a rising end position. In the back unit, the back decoration of the back movable movable effect unit is rotated in the clockwise direction in a front view clockwise at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decoration of the back four corner movable effect unit is at the appearance position It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner 1st decoration of the back four corners movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) It is a big hit judging table used for lottery processing about a big hit, and (B) It is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing about big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16mS steady process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is a timing chart of battle production. It is an explanatory view shown about an example of battle production. It is an explanatory view shown about an example of battle production. It is an explanatory view shown about an example of battle production. FIG. 17 is a front view of the gaming board obtained by cutting the front component and the front unit substantially at the center in the front-rear direction in the gaming area. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the right part in a game area in FIG. 174, (b) is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects along HH line | wire in (a), and shows only the principal part. FIG. 174 is an explanatory view showing the vicinity of the upper large winning opening in a magnified manner in FIG. 174. It is the perspective view which looked over the handle unit from the upper right. It is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship of both when a protrusion part contact | abuts with the right upper end of a dollar box. It is a perspective view of the 1st usage form of a handle unit (modification). It is a perspective view of the 2nd usage form of a handle unit (modification). It is a perspective view which shows the state which made the handle unit engage the covering with which the protrusion part was integrally formed from the handle cover front side. It is a schematic diagram which shows that a projection part is provided with the form which consists of one or several step-like part. It is a perspective view of a projection part and an operating handle. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the operation angle of a protrusion part, and a firing intensity. It is a characteristic view which shows the relationship between the operating angle of a protrusion part, and a firing intensity. It is a front view explaining the form of the player's hand holding a projection part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation form of the finger of the player who operates the touch detection part of a protrusion part. It is a schematic diagram explaining the contact state of a protrusion part and the rod-shaped body which protrudes from the outer frame of a game machine. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the form in which a protrusion part can be relatively rotated with respect to a handle body. FIG. 6 is a schematic view of the front of the handle main body having a scale indicating the operating angle of the protrusion.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 9 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, etc., an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-like door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which has a square outer shape in a front view and which penetrates back and forth, and a front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100 A bowl unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100 The game ball stored through the unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit 200 through the front lower right portion of the door frame base unit 100 and stored in the upper plate 201 Handle unit 500 which can be operated by the player to drive the game board 5 into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear face of the door frame base unit 100. And the game cover of the upper tray 201 attached to the lower portion of the rear face of the door frame base unit 100, which receives the game ball which is accidentally dropped into the game area and discharged to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200. A ball feed unit 540 for feeding to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through hole 111, and a crime prevention cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 ing.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base in a front view. , And the door Locking unit 700 for locking between 3 and main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side A unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 openably and closably attached to the main frame base 600 And a back cover 980.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate housed in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward And an upper full tank path unit 850 for releasing gaming balls from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200; The game ball released from the normal outlet of the upper full tank passage unit 850 attached to the lower end is guided forward to guide the gaming ball forward from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and discharged from the full tank outlet. Lower full-tan ball path uni with full-tan taxiway guiding full game ball forward and guiding from the front end to full-tan ball receptacle 530 of door frame 3 Is provided with a door 860, a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and having the power supply board housed therein, and the back side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled A payout control board box mounted over the interface control board box 940 in which the boards are housed, the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls inside is housed And 950.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a where the game ball is struck as shown in FIGS. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 And a main substrate for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200. A table having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings that can be installed in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a. A knit (not shown) and a back unit (not shown) having a liquid crystal display device attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 above the substrate box 1200 and visible from the player side through the game panel 1100 Have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 504 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength according to the rotation angle of the operation handle 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming ball driven into the game area 5a is received by the winning opening not shown, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 201 according to the accepted winning opening. . Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a front view of an outer frame of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a right side view of the outer frame. 12 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 15 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing an exploded view of (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left end. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after the The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 20 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end on the side surface that is the outside in the left-right direction. It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 60 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 (see FIG. 18 and the like).

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 3 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 15 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 15, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a whose right and left extend with a predetermined width and an operation part projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 17).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface in the vicinity of the front end of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 17). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A large plate 72 rising up, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 vertically penetrated so that only one game ball can pass And the discharge hole 74 of the The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 rightward in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws inserted from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. .

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. FIG. 16A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the upper hinge member. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bending bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 63 are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the locking member 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  The front end portion of the lock main body 66a faces the front protrusion 62 at a position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 even if the shape of the front end face is not an arc. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at the position where the rotational moment to be rotated occurs, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even when the member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, so the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Fig.18 (a) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 1, (b) is sectional drawing which shows the state which opened the main body frame with the door frame with respect to the outer frame in (a). FIG. 19 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the main frame is opened with respect to the outer frame by providing a guide vane at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member, and FIG. 19 (b) is an outside in the embodiment of (a) It is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the frame, and (c) is a state which provided the induction blade of the embodiment different from (a) and (b), and opened the main body frame to the outer frame It is explanatory drawing shown by (d) is explanatory drawing shown in the state which closed the main body frame with respect to the outer frame in embodiment of (c).

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. When the gaming ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) in the state where it is, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 by the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 because it is not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Since the left discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 etc. Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above configuration, when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 or the like. In order to facilitate this, as shown in FIG. 19, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 may be provided with guide vanes 95 and 96 for guiding the game balls to the discharge holes 74 and the like.

  Specifically, the leading edge of the guiding blade 95 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B protrudes outside the body frame 4, and the base end side is near the rear end of the left side surface of the body frame 4. It is pivotally mounted around an axis extending up and down at the side, and is formed in a rod shape. The guide vanes 95 are biased to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view by a spring (not shown). Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the state where the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vane 95 is slanted slightly rearward than the right angle with respect to the left side surface of the main frame 4. The pivoting end in the counterclockwise direction is restricted so as to be in the state of protruding in Accordingly, from this state, the guide vane 95 can be rotated so that the tip end side moves rearward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

  When the main body frame 4 is turned in the closing direction from the state in which the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the tip of the guide vane 95 contacts the right side surface of the rising portion 72 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. The guide vane 95 contacts the urging force of a spring (not shown) and pivots in the direction (clockwise direction in plan view) in which the tip moves rearward around the base end side. Then, when the main body frame 4 is further rotated in the closing direction, the guide vanes 95 are further rotated to a state where they project rearward from the main body frame 4, and the guide vanes 95 do not disturb the outer frame 2. And the main body frame 4 can be closed (see FIG. 19 (b)).

  When the game ball falls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 70 when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vanes 95 project diagonally left backward from the rear end of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be moved to the right by the left side surface of the main body frame 4 and the guide vane 95, and the game ball to the rear side of the main body frame 4 The rolling can be suppressed, and the game ball can be guided to the discharge hole 74 by moving the game ball to the right, and the game ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the guide vane 95 is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction in plan view to the state of FIG. 19A by the biasing force of a spring not shown. . Therefore, the guide vanes 95 of this embodiment rotate (move) along with the opening and closing operation of the main body frame 4.

  On the other hand, the guide vanes 96 shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D are attached at both ends to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as shown in the figure, and the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 At the same time, it is formed in a fan-shaped bellows-like shape which is expanded in a fan-like shape and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear and is folded when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide vanes 96 move in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 in the same manner as the above-described guide vanes 95.

  When the game ball falls onto the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 when the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the guide vanes 96 are expanded between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 The game ball which has fallen can be rolled back to the rear side than the main body frame 4 and guided by the guide vanes 96 which are provided, and from the discharge hole 74 and the right discharge hole 53 opened on the rear side of the main body frame 4 The game ball can be discharged downward. Therefore, the guiding vanes 96 can also prevent the game ball from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

  According to the present embodiment, since the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 can be guided to the discharge holes 74 by the guide vanes 95 and 96, the game balls can be discharged from the discharge holes 74 without increasing the size of the discharge holes 74. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the strength of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by increasing the size of the hole (the discharge hole 74) penetrating the horizontal portion 71. Therefore, even if a tool for performing cheating is inserted between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has sufficient strength, so the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is hard to be distorted, and it can suppress that a crevice is formed in a part of outer frame side lower hinge member 70, and it can prevent that a fraudulent act is performed.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the door frame. 22 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 has a door frame base unit 100 having a frame-like outer shape in a front view, a plate unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 350, the left side unit 400 attached to the front left of the door frame base unit 100, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100, and the front lower right of the door frame base unit 100 And a handle unit 500 mounted through the pan unit 200.

  Further, the door frame 3 is attached to the rear cover lower surface of the door frame base unit 100, the ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. And a crime prevention cover 580 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and back direction; A tubular handle attachment member 120 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and for attaching the handle unit 500, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110. The door frame side attached to upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left side in the front view and projecting forward and rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 The upper hinge member 140, the door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably attaching the glass unit 560. The unit mounting member 160, and a.

  Although the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is vertically arranged in a row and bulges forward, and can store the game balls; an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202; A plate unit base 210 attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 and an upper plate liquid crystal display 244 attached to the plate unit base 210 on the front side of the upper plate 201 and capable of displaying an image; On the right side of the top plate 201 in a front view, the effect operation unit 220 having the touch panel 246 and the top plate effect button 257 operable by the player, the plate unit cover 260 covering the top plate 201 and the bottom plate 202 from the front side A door lower right rendering unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotating according to the gaming state is covered from the front side of the door lower right rendering unit 270 A transparent effect unit cover 300, an upper tray ball removing unit 310 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 201 into the lower plate 202, and a device for removing gaming balls stored in the lower plate 202 downward. A lower plate ball draining unit 320, and a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (not shown, also referred to as a CR unit) disposed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, A top plate top decoration member 340 attached to the top of the tray unit base 210 and capable of emitting light is mainly provided.

  The top unit 350 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, etc., a unit base 360 partially attached along the upper side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a unit base A translucent top decoration member 370 attached to the center of the right and left at the front of the 360 and bulging forward, and a top speaker mounted in the top decoration member 370 and outputting high-pitched sound ( A door frame upper decorative substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof is provided.

  The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, a flat unit base 410 mounted along the left outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100; A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front of the base 410 and having its upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame on the front side of the left side decorative member 420 A left speaker unit 430 attached at a position to be the upper left corner of 3 and having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front And a left decorative substrate 440.

  The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3 has a flat unit base 460 attached along the right outer periphery of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front of the base 460 and having its upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350, and a front view door frame at the front of the right side decorative member 470 A right speaker unit 480 mounted at a position to be the upper right corner of 3 and having a right speaker (not shown), and mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decoration member 470 and having a plurality of LEDs on the front And a door frame right decoration substrate (not shown) to which is attached.

  The handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is pivotably attached to the handle main body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 and the handle main body 502 as shown in FIGS. The operating handle 504 (corresponding to a rotating body described in the claims), which can be pivoted by the player, is attached to the handle main body 502 from the front side of the operating handle 504 and cooperates with the handle main body 502 to operate the operating handle 504 And a handle cover 506 rotatably supporting the Further, although not shown, the handle unit 500 is mounted in the handle main body 502, and a handle operation sensor for detecting a rotation angle of the operation handle 504, and is attached to the handle main body 502 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a touch detection sensor attached to the inside of the handle main body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the operation handle 504 are provided.

  Next, the fal cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and has a shallow box shape open on the front side as shown in FIGS. And a flat lid member 524 attached to the front surface of the unit main body 522. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and connects the normal guiding path of the lower full ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 to the upper countersink supply port 210a of the dish unit 200. And 526, a full tank receiving hole 528 that opens rearward at the right side in a front view of the through ball passage 526 and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full ball unit 860 of the main body frame 4; A ball that opens upward at the right side of the ball socket 528 in a front view and receives a game ball (far ball) that has not been reached into the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball receptacle 530 and the bowl unit 200 which is opened forward in the lower right corner in a front view and releases gaming balls received in the full ball receptacle 528 and the far ball receptacle 530. Includes a ball outlet 532 which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 210c, the.

  The ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 542 and a box-like unit main body 542 which extends left and right and whose rear side is opened as shown in FIG. The unit cover 544 removably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 in a box shape with the front side opened and in a front view right side of the fal cover unit 520, A ball entry port 546 to which gaming balls stored in 201 enter, a ball exit port 548 which can release game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and is opened toward the rear, a ball entrance The game ball which has entered into 546 can be discharged, and there is provided a ball discharge port 550 which is open toward the front below the ball entry port 546. Also, although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 is a ball feeding solenoid for releasing game balls entering from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball outlet 548, and the game ball entering from the ball entrance 546 And a switching mechanism for switching either the ball outlet 548 side or the ball outlet 550 side.

  The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3 is attached to a frame-shaped unit frame 562 larger than the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 and to both front and rear sides of the unit frame 562 as shown in FIGS. And a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the frame of the cage unit frame 562.

[3-1. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 42. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit of the pan unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from below. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit as viewed from below.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit as viewed from the bottom. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the top, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit as viewed from the bottom. 40 is a plan view of the pan unit, FIG. 41 is an enlarged sectional view of a part of the rendering operation unit in the B-B cross section in FIG. 40, and FIG. 42 is a rendering operation in the C-C cross section in FIG. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a unit.

  Further, FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the lower right effect unit of the plate unit, FIG. 43 (b) is a right side view of the effect unit of the lower right portion, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right production unit from the back. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in the door lower right rendering unit of FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit of the door lower right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating-body internal unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating unit of the door lower right rendering unit facing forward, and FIG. 50 (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating member facing backward.

  FIG. 51 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the front with the upper countersinking unit attached to the dish unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 51 (b) is attached the upper countersinking unit to the dish unit base It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper countersink unit taken out from the rear. FIG. 54 (a) is a perspective view of the lower countersinking unit of the tray unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the lower countersinking unit, disassembled and viewed from the front.

  The plate unit 200 bulges forward from the door frame base unit 100. The plate unit 200 is disposed from the upper plate 201 below the upper plate 201 and stores the game balls which are paid out from the payout device 830 and which hold gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing a ball. Further, the plate unit 200 is attached to the flat plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 210, and the left side is greatly expanded forward from the left and right center. And a lower plate main body 214 attached to the left and right center at the lower front of the plate unit base 210 and bulging forward largely to form the lower plate 202. .

  Further, the pan unit 200 covers the front and bottom sides of the rendering operation unit 220 attached to the front side of the upper pan body 212 and the front surface of the pan unit base 210, the upper pan body 212, the lower pan body 214, and the rendering operation unit. A tray unit cover 260 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit 270 disposed on the right side of the rendering operation unit 220 and mounted to the front right portion of the tray unit base 210, a door lower right rendering unit A game unit cover 300 attached to the front of the tray unit base 210 covering the front side of the 270 and the gaming ball attached so as to sandwich the tray unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper tray 201 of the upper tray main body 212 And the lower tray body 214 below the lower tray body 214. Mounted includes a lower tray ball vent unit 320 for discharging the game ball that is stored in the lower tray 202 downward, the.

  Furthermore, the bowl unit 200 is attached to the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 220, and a bowl rental operation unit 330 for operating a bowl rental machine arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the gaming hall, It is attached to the upper part of the unit base 210, and it is attached to the light-decorable top tray top decoration member 340 and the front left side of the tray unit base 210 behind the tray unit cover 260 and can emit light forward. The unit is attached to the front right side of the dish unit base 210 behind the dish unit left decoration substrate 345 provided with a plurality of LEDs, behind the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270, and facing forward Dish unit right decoration board 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, and mounted on the back side of the dish unit base 210 An upper dish front decoration board 233, an upper dish back decoration board 235, an upper dish liquid crystal board 241, an excitation device 242, a touch panel 246, an effect button decoration board 251, an effect button press sensor 258, a door lower right relay board 281, A dish unit left decorative board 345 and a dish unit relay board 347 relaying the connection between the dish unit right decorative board 346 and the peripheral control board (not shown) of the game board 5 are provided.

3-1a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally to the entire width of the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. The pan unit base 210 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 210a and extends in a cylindrical shape extending backward. A speaker slit 210b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, a lower circular sphere feed port 210c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part in the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward, The ball feeding port 210c is provided with an upper flat ball feed port 210d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically and whose upper portion is positioned at the right end of the upper flat body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 210 is a through hole 210e having a square inner periphery penetrating in the front and rear direction on the left side in a front view of the upper plate ball feed port 210d, and a receiving plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. Piece 210f, relief hole 210g penetrating back and forth in front right upper side of upper flat ball feed port 210d, and front and back in front right lower corner of front view and handle attachment member 120 of door frame base unit 100 is inserted Handle insertion port 210h, a cylinder insertion port 210i which is penetrated back and forth near the front right corner and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a right side front view of a cylindrical lower circular sphere supply port 210c And a notch 210j which is cut away from the rear end to the front in the side surface of the frame.

[3-1 b. Upper plate body]
As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is greatly expanded forward on the left side than the center on the left and right in a front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward and backward. ing. The upper tray main body 212 is open only to the left and the rear on the right end side in a front view, and includes a guiding passage 212a through which the game balls can flow. The upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the bottom surface is entirely lower at the right end. More specifically, with the upper tray body 212 attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is from the lower position of the upper bowl ball supply port 210a to the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thus, the game balls discharged forward from the upper ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper plate main body 212, and the received game balls are received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the feed port 210d.

  Further, the upper plate main body 212 is provided with a metal ground fitting 212b which extends from the center on the left and right sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the grounding metal 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the gaming balls are in contact, static electricity charged on the gaming balls can be removed.

[3-1 c. Lower plate body]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the lower tray main body 214 of the tray unit 200 is formed in the shape of a container having a trapezoidal shape in which the rear end side is longer than the front end side and the upper side and the rear side are open. The lower bowl body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a which penetrates up and down at the bottom and can be closed by the lower bowl ball removal unit 320, and the bottom is inclined to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. doing. The lower dish main body 214 can receive and store gaming balls discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 210c of the dish unit base 210, and makes the gaming balls downward of the dish unit 200 from the ball extraction holes 214a. It can be discharged.

[3-1 d. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the rendering operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the attachment base unit 220A attached to the dish unit base 210 and the upper dish main body 212 at the center in the front view and the attachment base unit 220A. Touch unit 220B, a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side in a front view of the touch unit 220B, and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A The unit cover 224 is attached to the mounting base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from the upper side, and the decoration member 226 attached to the right end of the mounting base unit 220A in front view.

  The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed over the entire periphery at the center in the axial direction on the outer peripheral surface. The damper 222 in the present embodiment is formed of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 and the dish unit base 210 side by alleviating the impact when the touch unit 220B is struck, and the touch unit 220B will be described later. It can reduce that the vibration by the vibration excitation apparatus 242 is transmitted to the attachment base unit 220 or the dish unit base 210 side.

[3-1 d-1. Mounting base unit]
The mounting base unit 220A of the rendering operation unit 220 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front of the dish unit base 210 and opened upward, and above the mounting base 230. A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 attached at the front end of the upper tray main body 212 and being open at the upper end capable of accommodating the touch unit 200B from the upper side and a horizontally long upper tray attached to the front end of the unit case 231 A unit cover which covers the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232 and the upper plate front decoration substrate 233 disposed between the front lens member 232, the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and having a plurality of LEDs at the front surface And 240. A translucent upper-dish front decoration member 234 attached to 224.

  The mounting base unit 220A is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231, and is provided with a plurality of LEDs for emitting light upward, and a decoration substrate 235 for upper dish and an upper side of the decoration board 235 for upper dish. Between the upper plate rear decorative member 236 having a light transmitting property disposed on the unit cover 224 and the upper plate rear decorative member 236 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the upper plate rear decoration member 236 And a cylindrical button attachment member 238 attached to the unit cover 224 on the right side in a front view of the upper back decoration member 236, and a button attachment member. And an upper disc ball release button 239 slidably mounted up and down by 238.

  The mounting base 230 is a flat-plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a which is inclined downward from the approximate center of the front to the front, and the mounting side receiving portion 230a penetrates the mounting side receiving portion 230a. And a cylindrical cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the peripheral edge of the through hole 230b. The through hole 230 b has a rectangular inner periphery. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape so as to be narrowed toward the lower side (see FIG. 42). More specifically, in the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, the front inner circumferential wall extends substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a, and the rear inner circumferential wall is below the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a. It inclines and extends forward as it goes to the other side. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined such that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to each other with respect to the vertical of the surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a.

  The unit case 231 is opened upward and protrudes forward and backward from the accommodation recess 231a capable of accommodating the touch unit 220B and the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a in the front view from the front to the left and the other in a cylindrical shape. The horizontal support pin 231b, and a pair of front support pins 231c projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a at right and left, and from the left and right center of the bottom of the housing recess 231a It has a central support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e projecting in a pyramid shape so as to be narrowed downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a and separated to the left and right. .

  The unit case 231 is vertically and circularly penetrated vertically on the left side of the accommodation recess 231a, and is disposed around the insertion hole 231f through which the lower portion of the button unit 220C is inserted, and the insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit attachment portion 231g for attaching the button unit 220C, a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending downward from the upper end and extending laterally from the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the accommodation recess 231a And a notch portion 231h.

  The housing concave portion 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in which a shape in plan view is a combination of a square extending in the left and right direction and a trapezoid protruding outward from both left and right sides of the square. Further, the bottom of the square portion of the housing recess 231a is formed lower than the bottom of the trapezoidal portion of the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a is formed slightly lower than the height (the length in the axial direction) of the damper 222.

  The four horizontal support pins 231 b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231 a, and are formed so as to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. Further, the horizontal support pin 231b is provided with a truncated cone-shaped tapered portion 231i at the upper end side, the diameter of which decreases as going to the upper end side (see FIG. 41). The distance between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231 a and the middle of the tapered portion 231 i is the same as the length of the damper 222, and the entire length of the horizontal support pin 231 b is longer than that of the damper 222. The pair of front support pins 231 c is insertable into the cylindrical damper 222 and is formed to be slightly longer than a half length of the damper 222.

  The upper end of the central support protrusion 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving protrusion 231 e is formed in a truncated cone shape having a square outer periphery. The two receiving protrusions 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230. In the receiving protrusion 231e, the outer peripheral wall on the front side extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a, and the outer peripheral wall on the rear side is inclined forward toward the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. It extends. Further, the receiving projection 231e is extended so that the outer peripheral walls on the left and right sides are inclined so that the lower ends (tips) are slightly closer to the vertical of the surface of the housing recess 231a. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230. The lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231 in the assembled state, and a slight gap is formed between the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

  The upper front decoration member 234 exposes the front to the outside when the lower unit 200 is assembled. The upper dish and rear decoration substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for emitting and decorating the upper dish and rear decoration member 236, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for emitting and decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237. .

  The linear light emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the light receiving section 237a disposed on the upper side of the plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b of the upper dish rear decoration substrate 235; And a flat linear light emitting portion 237b fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231 in a continuous manner. In the linear light emitting lens member 237, the front surface of the linear light emitting portion 237a forms a part of the inner peripheral wall of the accommodation recess 231a by fitting the linear light emitting portion 237b into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231. Further, in the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside in a state where the plate unit 200 is assembled. The linear light emitting lens member 237 can receive the light from the peripheral LED 235b by the light receiving unit 237a, and guides the light received by the light receiving unit 237a to the linear light emitting unit 237b to make the linear light emitting unit 237b The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

  The upper disc ball release button 239 is attached slidably in the vertical direction by the button attachment member 238, and includes an extension piece 239a which extends downward from the button attachment member 238. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper plate ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 from the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 )be able to.

  The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B by the dampers 222 respectively inserted into the four horizontal support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of two receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward of the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 into which the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted below the unit case 231. A slight gap is formed between the cylindrical receiving portion and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that causes the unit case 231 to move downward from the touch unit 220 B side acts, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The bottom surface of the recess 231a is bent downward to some extent, and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving protrusion 231e abuts on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c, whereby the force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. That is, when the force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, the unit case 231 bends, so that the force can be attenuated to some extent and transmitted to the mounting base 230 by the bending.

  Further, the receiving projection 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 have an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface inclined with respect to the surface (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B) on which they are formed. Because the surface is provided, a part of the force transmitted from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a provided with the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. Do. As a result, the force from the side of the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) is dispersed, and it is possible to prevent the large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

3-1d-2. Touch unit]
As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the touch unit 220B of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-like lower case 240 whose upper side is opened, and an upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 attached from the upper side in the lower case 240. The upper case is attached to the lower case 240 while covering the upper sides of a pair of vibration devices 242, the pair of vibration devices 242 and the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 disposed in the lower case 240 outside the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 A shallow box-like base member 243, an upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 inserted from the upper side in the base member 243 and capable of displaying an image under control of the upper-dish liquid crystal substrate 241; A frame-shaped earth metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate covering the outer periphery, and a transparent touch panel covering the top surface of the earth metal fitting 245 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 And 246, and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 which is attached to the lower case 240, a through covering the base member 243 of the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from the upper side.

  In the state where the lower case 240, the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 are assembled, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 at their rear end surfaces. It has a waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 attached to the rear end surface of the lower case 240, the base member 243, and the upper cover 247 which extends over substantially the entire length of the rear end surface of the case 240 etc. ing.

  The outer case of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213 a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213 a. The lower case 240 has a rectangular substrate attachment portion 240 a extending in the left and right direction, a flat plate-like projection 240 b projecting in a trapezoidal shape from both left and right sides of the substrate attachment portion 240 a, and the projection 240 b. And a pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically penetrated in the same inner shape and which are partially opened to the outside in the left and right direction and spaced apart back and forth and projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c The vibration device mounting portion 240e is disposed between the flange portion 240d and the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b, and is disposed closer to the substrate mounting portion 240a and to which the vibration generating device 242 is mounted.

  The damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C-shape in a plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C-shape. Further, the flange portion 240d is provided substantially at the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240 d is insertable into the groove 222 a of the damper 222.

  The excitation device 242 includes a small excitation drive motor 242 a and a weight 242 b attached with the center of gravity eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft of the excitation drive motor 242 a. The vibration generator 242 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 242 b by the vibration drive motor 242 a.

  The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a formed in a shallow box shape by inserting the upper-tray liquid crystal display device 244 from the upper side, and extending portions 243 b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243 a. A screw hole 243c which penetrates up and down at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip end of the extending portion 243b and formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c And a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 41) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

  The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side to pass through the tapered portion 231i of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231, and the proximal end (lower side) than the tapered portion 231i It is formed in the size which can not pass.

  The touch panel 246 is provided with a tempered glass which is resistant to breakage due to impact, a capacitive sensor transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover covering the outer periphery of the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

  The damper 222 can be attached to the touch unit 220B by inserting the damper 222 from the open side of the C character into the damper attachment recess 240c provided on the left and right of the lower case 240, respectively. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222. As a result, axial movement of the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240 c is restricted. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper mounting recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 abuts on the lower surface of the extending portion 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is lower than the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. Stand out.

  Further, in the touch unit 220 B, the excitation drive motor 242 a of the pair of excitation devices 242 is sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. The pair of excitation devices 242 can generate vibrations independently of each other.

  In addition, the touch unit 220B can visually recognize the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 through the touch panel 246 from the upper side. Then, an image of a button or the like is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 so as to operate the button of the image.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has the prevention water seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when the liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid may enter the touch unit 220B. Thus, the touch unit 220B can be prevented from being damaged by the infiltration of liquid.

3-1d-3. Button unit]
As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the button unit 220C of the rendering operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 in the attachment base unit 220A, and a lower portion of the unit body 250. A presentation button decoration substrate 251 disposed on the side and provided with LEDs on the top surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the bottom side of the presentation button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the bottom side of the unit body 250 are provided.

  The button unit 220C is disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, with the button base 253 being inserted between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250. A spring member 254 for urging the light guide member 255, a light guide member 255 which is inserted into the button base 253 and can guide light from the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 upward, and a plurality of minute members arranged above the light guide member 255 Sheet-like diffusion lens member 256 having a prism, an upper plate effect button 257 having a light transmitting property that covers the upper side of the diffusion lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the top surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251 And an effect button press sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end.

  The unit body 250 extends outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface, and has three attachment pieces 250a attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface , And a pair of through holes 250c penetrating the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

  The button base 253 has a cylindrical lower cylindrical portion 253a inserted into the inner periphery of the shelf 250b, a conical cylindrical upper cylindrical portion 253b whose diameter increases in the upward direction from the upper end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a, and an upper portion A claw which extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end is capable of penetrating the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and which can be projected outward from the lower end and can be engaged (contacted) with the lower surface of the unit main body 250 A pair of engaging claws 253c having a pair of pins and radially outwardly projecting shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250 A plurality of flat contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward from the outer peripheral surface of the lower cylindrical portion 253a and the upper cylindrical portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258 There.

  The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 is in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250, and the upper end is supported by the plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253.

  The light guiding member 255 extends from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253 from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a. And a plurality of cylindrical light guides 255b. The plurality of light guiding parts 255b are provided to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251, and can guide light from the LEDs and emit the light from the entire top surface of the main part 255a.

  In the button unit 220C, the button base 253, the light guide member 255, the diffusion lens member 256, and the upper dish effect button main body are integrally assembled, and they may slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. it can. In the button base 253 and the like, the upper surface of the upper dish effect button 257 projects upward than the upper end of the unit body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 By engaging with the lower surface 250, the further rise is regulated, and the upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the rising end.

  When the upper dish effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper dish effect button 257 etc. is lowered, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button press sensor 258. A pressing operation of the dish effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 is lowered by pressing the upper dish effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 are in contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit main body 250, and further lowering is restricted. The upper dish effect button 257 or the like is positioned at the lower end.

  Further, the button unit 220C can emit light and decorate the upper dish effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration substrate 251 to emit light. The LEDs of the effect button decoration substrate 251 are full color LEDs, and the upper dish effect buttons 257 can be lighted and decorated in various colors.

3-1d-4. Characteristics of Production Operation Unit]
In the effect operation unit 220 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B in the assembled state is from the lower surface of the lower case 240 Also, since it protrudes downward, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 coincide with the bottom surface of the counterbore of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243, and the touch unit 220B is moved upward relative to the horizontal support pins 231b. The movement is regulated by a flat washer on the head of the screw 227 screwed into the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. The tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and the tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in the rendering operation unit 220, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted in the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly smaller than the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a on the side of the horizontal support pin 231b. It projects upward. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the lower A gap is also formed between the lower surface of the case 240 and the lower surface of the case 240. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240. That is, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A with the lower surface floating in the air by the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on the left and right sides.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 220 tapers downward in the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached from the upper side in the pyramidal cylindrical tubular receiving portion 230c that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the whole pyramidal receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. Thus, in the normal state, only the outer periphery of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 in a state where the inside of the unit case 231 (the center side of the accommodation recess 231a) floats in the air.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31 etc., in the effect operation unit 220, the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237 is linear (along the rear side closer to the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B). Striped). The length of the upper end of the linear light emitting part 237b is about 2/3 of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. An upper rear decoration member 236 is disposed on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, on the right side in a front view of the upper plate rear decoration member 236, an upper plate ball withdrawal button 239 is disposed. Furthermore, the button unit 220C is disposed on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view.

  The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the gaming state which is changed by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, an image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 and enjoyed.

  An image imitating the operation button is displayed as the image displayed on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the detection of the touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be accepted to allow the player to receive the image. The operation button can be operated, and the effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 at the time of presentation using the touch panel 246 is not limited to the operation button, and various images can be displayed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the plurality of dampers 222 in a floating state from the unit case 231, the touch unit 220B is operated by operating the vibration device 242 according to the game state. It can be vibrated. In the effect using the touch panel 246, the vibration of the touch panel 246 (the touch unit 220B) is vibrated by the vibration generator 242 so that the finger of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246 vibrates the touch panel 246. Even if the player operates the image operation button to the player, the player can be surprised as though the user operates the operation button having a substantial effect, and can be surprised by the touch panel 246 and the effect by the vibration. Can be entertained to the player to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 includes the button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in a front view, the player is allowed to press the upper plate effect button 257 in accordance with the game state. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation button on the touch panel 246 is a touch only on the touch panel 246, and there is a dislike that it lacks the feeling of operation compared to the actual operation button. Therefore, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the operation of the upper plate effect button 257 without giving a sense of discomfort to the operation of the upper plate effect button 257, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game .

  Since this effect operation unit 220 is disposed at the portion where the upper plate 201 is provided in the plate unit 200 bulging forward, the game is performed even during the effect other than using the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C. There is a risk that the user may hit the touch unit 220B etc. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a floating state from the lower unit case 231, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above, the elasticity of the damper 222 The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) is applied from above, the left and right horizontal support pins 231b are transmitted to the inserted dampers 222, and the touch unit 220B is lowered while the dampers 222 are lowered. Is compressed. By compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed.

  Then, when the touch unit 220B is further lowered by the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 abuts on the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and is supported by the front support pin 231c as the touch unit 220B is lowered. The damper 222 being compressed is compressed downward. Thus, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the damper 222 supported by the front support pin 231c in addition to the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

  When the touch unit 220B is further lowered by an impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts on the left and right bottom surfaces of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support protrusion 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without the intervention of the plurality of dampers 222.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is lowered, the load from the central support protrusion 231d causes the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a of the unit case 231 to bend so that the center thereof moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a. When the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is bent, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e which project downward from the lower side of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a is lowered. Then, when the receiving protrusion 231e is further lowered by an impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e contacts the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B An impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230.

  The outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are formed in the shape of a pyramid which is respectively narrowed downward, so from the receiving protrusion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side) The load to be transmitted is distributed and transmitted in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230 a of the mounting base 230 and in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. As described above, by the number of layers of structures that absorb the impact applied to the touch unit 220B before the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. Thus, the touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be less likely to be damaged by the impact.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 220 is a linear light emitting portion of the linear light emitting lens member 237 extending along the rear peripheral edge of the touch unit 220B by the peripheral LED 235b of the upper dish rear decorative substrate 235 according to the gaming state The top end of 237 b can emit light linearly. Thereby, the interest of the player can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper-dish liquid crystal display device 244 in the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the game state, the decoration light up decoration member 236 which is arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (rear side than the linear light emitting portion 237b) by the decoration LED 235a of the decoration back light board 235 be able to. By making the upper back decoration member 236 emit light and decoration, as with the light emission of the linear light emitting portion 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237, the player's interest is attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B. It is possible to enjoy the effects presented by the effect operation unit 220 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is covered by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. And a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 or the game ball by touching the outside air in the upper plate 201 flows downward (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262) of the upper plate 201. Thus, it is possible to prevent the dew condensation water from intruding into the touch unit 220B, and to prevent a malfunction from occurring in the touch unit 220B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

[3-1 e. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally as shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and is formed in a shell shape with the centers on the left and right bulging forward and opened rearward. . The pan unit cover 260 opens forward substantially at the center between the left and right, and has a lower pan opening 261 whose rear end is closed by the pan unit base 210 and a top plate side (upper side) in the inner peripheral wall of the lower pan opening 261 And a lower cover portion 262 covering the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the rendering operation unit 220, and a bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 disposed on the left side in front view of the lower plate opening 261 The speaker grill 263 for transmitting the sound from the speakers, the plate unit left decoration member 264 disposed above the speaker grill 263 and illuminated by the plate unit left decoration substrate 345 and disposed on the right side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view And the bottom of the dish unit cover 260 is formed by the handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes. A bottom plate portion 266 for covering the lower Rishitasara body 214, and a, a bottom plate opening 267 is closed by the lower tray ball vent unit 320 penetrates the bottom plate portion 266 on the upper and lower left and right of the center.

  The lower plate opening portion 261 is closed by the lower plate main body 214 on the bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner circumferential wall. The speaker grille 263 and the plate unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal provided with a plurality of holes in a metal plate.

  The surface of the plate unit cover 260 is formed to have a smooth surface on the left side in a front view, while the surface on the right side is formed to have a rough surface. In addition, the right side in the front view has a light transmitting property substantially entirely.

  The plate unit cover 260 is formed in an assembled state with the plate unit 200 such that an interval between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 can be held by one hand. Thus, when the player performs touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the finger (hand or arm) to be touched can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, and touch operation on the touch unit 220B is performed. Can be done easily.

  More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper pan lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper pan lower covering portion 262 The thickness between the lower surface and the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the distance between the front end of the lower pan covering part 262 and the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Further, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined at about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. Thus, the player can grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper tray lower covering portion 262 with the hand of the player.

[3-1 f. Door lower right production unit]
The door lower right rendering unit 270 of the dish unit 200 is disposed on the upper side of the handle unit 500 and to the right of the rendering operation unit 200 as shown in FIGS. 43 to 50, and rotates according to the gaming state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for emitting light is provided. The door lower right rendering unit 270 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the relief opening 210g, and is attached to the unit base 271 rotatably supporting the door lower right rotating body 270A A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotation shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 engaged with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotary body 270A, a follower And a shaft member 275 rotatably supporting the gear 274 and attached to the unit base 271.

  In addition, the door lower right rendering unit 270 is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotating body 270A to the driven gear 274 and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 rotatably supporting the opposite side of the rotating body 270A with the driven gear 274 in cooperation with the unit base 271 and a rotation of the door lower right-handed rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271 Two rotation detection sensors 278 that can detect the position, a decoration member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side in a front view of the door lower right rotation body 270A, and a back side of the unit base 271 A door lower right base decoration substrate 280 provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a door lower right drive motor 272 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 271 A detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decorative substrate 280, and a door lower right relay substrate 281 relaying connection between a door lower right rotary substrate decorative substrate 291 described later and a peripheral control substrate (not shown) are provided. .

  The door lower right rotation body 270A constitutes an outer shell, and each is disposed between the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 in a hemispherical shell shape, and the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 And a rotating body internal unit 290. The front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are respectively formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a around the rotation axis. The front shell member 285 has a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, a band decoration 285 b having a metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction and a heart shape disposed at the center of the band decoration 285 b The heart of the decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286 b having metallic luster and extending in the circumferential direction in a band shape on the translucent hemispherical shell-like surface. When the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286 are combined, the band decoration 285 b of the front outer shell member 285 and the band decoration 286 b of the rear outer shell member 286 are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the rotating body internal unit 290 has a disk shape and is provided with a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and the center of the door lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 and the center of the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 A cylindrical first fixed shaft member 292, which is attached to the bottom right side of the door lower right rotation body decorative substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 A cylindrical shape which is attached to the opposite side of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the unit base 271 and the base side bearing member 277 And a second fixed shaft member 293. Although illustration is omitted, a wiring cord for connecting the door lower right relay substrate 281 and the door lower right rotator decorative substrate 291 is inserted in the second fixed shaft member 293.

  In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is a flat, annular transparent reflector base 294 disposed on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and attached to the inside of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. And an annular, axially outwardly opened first reflector 295 mounted on the reflector base 294 and a reflector base 294 mounted inside the annular ring of the first reflector 295 to the center and having a hexagonal shape And a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect light from the door lower right rotating member decoration substrate 291. Further, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of radially extending flat ribs.

  The rotary body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotary body decoration substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, Relatively rotatable, they are separated from each other.

  The unit base 271 has a flat ring shape forward from the front right upper portion with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the door lower right rotation body 270A and the ring portion 271a Of the first projecting piece 271b projecting in the second direction, and a second projecting piece 271c projecting in a plate shape forward from a portion of the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and And a bearing groove 271d into which the tip end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted in a U-shape toward the rear from the front end.

  The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first projecting piece 271b in a state where the rotation shaft passes through. The driven gear 274 is formed larger in diameter than the drive gear 273. The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b which protrudes from the attachment portion 275a in a cylindrical shape. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b, and can rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 275b.

  The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat detection piece 276b extending outward. The base bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271 d of the front end of the second projecting piece 271 c in the unit base 271. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second projecting piece 271 c symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the door lower right rotation body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 have rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotation body 270A faces the front (see FIG. 50A) and rotational positions where the heart decoration 285c faces the rear (FIG. 50B) Can be detected respectively.

  The door lower right rendering unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stops so that the heart decoration 285c faces the front. It is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like depending on whether or not the player is entertained and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right rendering unit 270, the door right right while the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates When the lower rotary body decorative substrate 291 (of the LED) emits light, the position of light emitted from the door lower right rotary body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotary body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 or the first reflector 295 Since the direction of the light reflected and induced by the two reflectors 296 changes, the light emitting decoration of the door lower right rotating body 270A is lit as if the light is blinking even if the LED of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 is not blinked The door lower right rotation body 270A can be made to emit light in a rainbow color by being made to emit light of various colors from the LED, and the player can be entertained.

[3-1 g. Production unit cover]
As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the effect unit cover 300 of the pan unit 200 includes a hemispherical transparent rotary body cover portion 301 covering the front side of the spherical door lower right rotary body 270A in the door lower right staging unit 270. The decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotary body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side in a front view of the plate unit cover 260 and penetrating in the front and rear in the lower right side of the rotary body cover portion 301 And a cylinder insertion port 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

  The effect unit cover 300 is in the form of a container whose back is open as a whole, and has translucency. In the effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is decorated with light emission by the door lower right base decoration substrate 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover portion 301 is the dish unit right decoration substrate 346 Embellished by

[3-1 h. Upper bowl balling unit]
As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the upper bowl / balloon removing unit 310 of the bowl unit 200 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 210 so as to cover the through hole 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the bowl unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having an insertion opening 311a in the upper part of which the extension piece 239a of the upper countersink ball release button 239 can be inserted at the upper part thereof, and a through hole 210e of the tray unit base 210 in the cover 311 A front base member 312 attached at a position on the upper left of the front view, a press transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and pivoted by pressing of the upper disc ball release button 239, and a press transmission member And 313 a first spring member 314 which biases the upper disc ball release button 239 in the upward direction.

  Further, the upper disc ball removing unit 310 is provided with a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the disc unit base 210 so as to close the upper disc ball feed port 210d of the disc unit base 210 from the rear side; An upper disc ball withdrawal slider 316 disposed between the disc unit base 210 and the disc unit base 210 and mounted so as to be vertically movable by the rear base member 315 and in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from the upper side; And a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

  The front base member 312 extends in parallel to the front surface of the pan unit base 210, and has a flat base 312a attached to the cover 311, and a pair of extended flats extending forward from the left and right sides of the base 312a. It is provided in the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a and the rear end of the first spring member 314 is locked. And a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

  The pressure transmitting member 313 has a horizontally elongated cylindrical shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape An upper extension piece 313c which extends in a flat plate shape upward from near the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the extension piece 313b and the rear extension piece 313b and can contact the lower end of the extension piece 239c of the upper disc ball release button 239 And a lower extending piece 313d extending downward in a flat plate shape from the right end in the front view on the lower surface of the rear extending piece 313b, and a downward direction from the lower side near the left end in the front view in the shaft portion 313a And a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downward extending piece 313 d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can be brought into contact with the upper countersink slider 316.

  The rear base member 315 extends flatly in parallel to the rear surface of the pan unit base 210, and is provided with a base portion 315a attached to the pan unit base 210, and is separately provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a The slider support portion 315b slidably supports the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the front end of the plate unit base 210 at the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper bowl ball feed port 210d. It has an upper entrance 315c which opens downward on the rear side of the base part 315a and through which gaming balls can flow.

  In addition, the rear base member 315 extends downward continuously with the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and is open rearward and has a lower end curved in the rear direction, and An L-shaped second induction passage 315e which extends downward from the lower side of the first induction passage 315d and extends leftward in a front view and whose left end is opened leftward and the whole is opened rearward; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat channel lid 315f closing the rear end side of the left extending portion of the induction path 315e and the L-shaped second induction path 315e. An opening 315g is provided, and a spring locking portion 315h protruding in a boss shape forward from the front surface of the base 315a and to which the upper end of the second spring member 317 is locked.

  The L-shaped second guide path 315e of the rear base member 315 is inclined so that the left-side extending portion becomes lower toward the left. The left end of the second induction passage 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower bowl ball supply port 210c in the plate unit base 210, as shown in FIG. 51 (b). The lower flat ball supply port 210c is in communication with each other.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 316 is a flat plate having a slider base 316a slidably supported at the left and right ends on the slider support portion 315b of the rear base member 315, and a plate from the left to the front from the front view center at the upper end of the slider base 316a. A transmission piece 316b capable of contacting the lower end of the downward extension piece 313d of the pressure transmission member 313 with the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f extending through the through hole 210e of the unit base 210 and the slider on the lower side of the transmission piece 316b A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c that protrudes rearward as it goes downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement that protrudes from the front surface of the slider base 316a and the lower end of the second spring member 317 is locked. And a stop portion 316d.

  In the upper tray bowling unit 310, when the tray unit 200 is assembled, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 is opened at the lower end on the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper inlet 315 c via the first guiding portion 315 d on the rear side of the base portion 315 a.

  Further, when the upper disc ball extracting button 239 is pressed downward, the push transmitting member 313 resists the biasing force of the first spring member 314 by the extension piece 239 a of the upper disc ball extracting button 239. Then, the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d pivots in the direction of moving downward about the shaft portion 313a. When the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressing transmission member 313, the upper flat ball withdrawal slider 316's transmission piece 316b with which the lower end of the downward extending piece 313d abuts. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317.

  When the upper ball ball removal slider 316 slides downward, the operation transmission unit 316 c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feed unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feed unit 540, and the first guide path The 315 d side is in communication with the second guide path 315 e side. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper inlet 315c, the first induction passage 315d, the ball feeding unit 540, and the second induction passage 315e. , The game ball in the upper plate 201 can be pulled out.

  In addition, when the downward pressing of the upper disc ball releasing button 239 is released, the upper disc ball extracting slider 316 and the upper disc ball removing button 239 are raised by the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317. It is possible to return to the original state.

[3-1 i. Lower bowl balling unit]
The lower countersink removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260 as shown in FIG. A flat-plate-shaped lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the extraction hole 214a, and a flat-plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide over the lower-disc spherical-extraction base 321 to close the opening 321a. , A knob attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed from the front of the plate unit cover 260 to the outside, and a spring biasing the slide lid 322 in the direction of closing the opening 321a by the slide lid 322 A member 324, and a holding device 325 for holding the slide lid 322 in the position opening the opening 321a against the biasing force of the spring member 324; It is provided.

  The opening 321a of the lower countersinking base 321 is formed at a position closer to the right from the left and right in the front view. By mounting the lower tray ball removal base 321 to the lower plate main body 212, the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower plate ball removal base 321 and the lower plate main body 212. The slide lid 322 includes a holding protrusion 322 a held by the holding device 325 on the left end side in a front view.

  The holding device 325 is provided with a main body 325a attached to the lower ball ball withdrawal base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b which can be opened and closed from the main body 325a and can grip the holding projection 322a. The holding device 325 inserts the holding projection 322a between the pair of open holding claws 325a and presses the holding projection 322a toward the main body 325a, thereby closing the pair of holding claws 325b and holding the holding projections 322a. The claws 325b are kept closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved to the main body 325a side, the pair of holding claws 325a is opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

  In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is located between the opening 321a and the lower hole body 214a of the lower plate main body 214 in a state where the picker 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without being dropped downward from the ball removal holes 214 a.

  From this state, by operating the knob portion 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removing hole 214a communicate. As a result, the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 come out of the lower portion of the tray unit 200 through the ball holes 214a and the opening 321a, and the gaming balls in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding projection 322a of the slide lid 322 is held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob portion 323 is stopped. You can keep pulling out the game balls inside.

  To close the slide cover 322, slightly operating the knob 323 to the left opens the pair of holding claws 325b and releases the holding projections 322a, and the biasing force of the spring member 324 slides the slide cover 322 to the right. Then, the ball removal hole 214a is closed. As described above, by operating the knob portion 323 of the lower ball ball emptying unit 320, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 202, or the game balls stored in the lower plate 202 can be removed.

[3-1 j. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., a unit case 331 attached to the upper surface near the right end in front view in the rendering operation unit 220 and translucent. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, and a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player; And a display section 334 which can be viewed from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 on the rear side of the return button 333.

  The ball lending operation unit 330 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls into a bowl unit by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball lending button 332. 200 can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper plate 201, and when the return button 333 is pressed, the remaining amount of the rented portion is subtracted and the cash remainder or prepaid card inserted is returned. Further, the display unit 334 displays the number of remaining cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, and the like.

[3-1 k. Upper plate top decoration member]
The upper dish top decorative member 340 of the dish unit 200 is, as shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., attached to the left and right center at the upper end of the dish unit base 210 and has a translucent upper dish top lens An upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

  The upper dish top decorative member 340 can cause the upper dish top lens 340a to emit light in a band by causing the LEDs of the upper dish top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper dish top decorative member 340 is disposed on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper dish top decorative member is the same as the light emitting decoration such as the upper dish rear decoration member 236 and the linear luminous lens member 237 By making the light emitting decoration 340 possible, the player's interest can be attracted to the rendering operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the effect presented by the rendering operation unit 220 is enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest be able to.

[3-1 l. Characteristic effects of dish unit]
The dish unit 200 of this embodiment is a game ball within the game area 5a in the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 having the upper dish 201 for storing the game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When displaying an image on the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 in accordance with the gaming state changing by typing in, the upper dish liquid-crystal display 244 has a strip shape along the outer peripheral edge on the side close to the game area 5a. Since the linear light emitting lens member 237, the upper dish rear decoration member 236, and the upper dish top decoration member 340 can emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (view) Light from the outside of the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. entering from the outside, and attracts the line of sight (interest) of the player to the linear luminous lens member 237 etc. Can. Therefore, when presenting effects such as an image according to the game state in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light emission lens member 237 or the like is made to emit light, thereby providing the player with the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The presentation of the effect can be noticed, and it is possible to enjoy the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when displaying an image suggesting the arrival of a chance, it is arranged outside the gaming area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 being played, it is possible for the player to play the game in the game area 5a and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. And both can be bothered. Therefore, by giving attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed, and when displaying an image indicating the arrival of a chance on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the player can be made to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 by making the linear light emitting lens member 237 emit light. It is possible to make the player pay attention and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will not be able to concentrate on either of the gaming area 5a and the gaming area 5a, and may decrease interest, but the gaming state Since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light according to the arrival), the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be concentrated in the game area 5a until the light emission and the game within the game area 5a is enjoyed As the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like emit light, the effect on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened and tired.

  In addition, since the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the dish unit 200 which bulges to the player side below the game area 5a, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is disposed at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 can be easily concealed by the player located in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display 244 becomes difficult to see from other players behind and behind The effect presented by the upper-dish liquid crystal display 244 can be enjoyed only by the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and decrease in interest by being scolded by another player when enjoying the effects by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and it is also possible to reduce the upper plate liquid crystal display device. The linear luminous lens member 237 or the like emits light at the time of presentation of the effect by 244, making it difficult to miss the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and entertaining Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light emission lens members 237 and the like can be made more noticeable than in the case of emitting light in a dot shape. Can be made to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc. easily, and enjoy the effects of the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the touch panel 246 etc. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission aspect is different from the light emission of the other light emission decorative body etc., and misunderstanding as light emission of the light emission decorative body etc can be reduced. The light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 can be surely noticed.

  In addition, since the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are disposed at a position on the rear side close to the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like The light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of vision, and the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like can be noticed to enjoy the effect of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.

  Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like, there is provided the effect operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 and the like, and the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is struck in the game area 5a. The upper dish liquid crystal display 244 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like are turned when the line of sight is directed to the upper plate 201 since the player for checking the amount of game balls to be closed turns the line of sight at a certain frequency. It becomes easy to notice the light emission of the linear light emitting lens member 237. Further, since the player turns the gaze toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the gaze from the inside of the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display 244). Therefore, when the light emission from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is noticed, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is enjoyed and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the rendering operation unit 200 is disposed below the gaming area 5a, and light from the linear luminous lens member 237 or the like is emitted from the bottom to the player, therefore, it is disposed above the gaming area 5a. Compared to the above, it is easy for the player to easily see the light of the linear light emitting lens member 237 etc., so that it becomes possible to make the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 pay attention to the player reliably. It is possible to enjoy the effect by the operation unit 200 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper dish liquid crystal display device 244) is disposed at a position corresponding to the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 5a, the center of the line of sight of the player is in any position in the game area 5a. However, it is possible to easily notice the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 and the like, and it is possible to surely make the player pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display 244, and enjoy the effect by the effect operation unit 200. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, in addition to the rendering by the image, it is possible to perform rendering for causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, and it is possible to entertain the player by various renderings. By causing the player to operate the touch panel 246, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the effect, and it is possible to actively enjoy the effect for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, the linear light emitting lens member 237 (linear light emitting unit 237b) disposed along the outer peripheral edge on the rear side of the touch unit 220B transfers the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball emitting device 680). An upper tray ball extraction button 239 is disposed along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and operates the upper tray ball removal unit 310 with the guide passage portion 212a. That is, the linear luminous lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of a place where the player confirms the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear luminous lens member 237 is disposed at a position which the player cares during the game. Therefore, the light emission of the linear light emission lens member 237 can be noticed, and the player's interest is drawn to the touch unit 220B and the effect by the touch unit 220B (effect image by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246 It is easy to notice the timing of touch operation etc.).

  Further, the touch unit 220B including the upper dish liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper dish liquid crystal display 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper dish lower covering portion 262 of the dish unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231. Since the waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side of the touch unit 220B while being disposed at a position higher than that of the touch unit 220B, the outer plate 201 can be exposed to the air on the upper plate main body 212 or the surface of the game ball Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows downward of the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262), the condensed water can be prevented from entering the touch unit 220B, and the touch unit 220B Can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42, since the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 for emitting and decorating the upper plate rear decoration member 236 and the linear light emitting lens member 237 is disposed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the upper plate 201, It is possible to prevent a problem such as short circuit or corrosion from occurring in the upper plate rear decoration substrate 235 without being exposed to the water droplets condensed by the upper plate 201.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B including the touch panel 246 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating unit 242 in the effect operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200, a plurality (two) of the touch units 220B are provided. The damper 222 is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state so that the vibration of the touch unit 220B (excitation device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch unit 220B of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibration device 242, only the touch unit 220B is vibrated. It is possible to sufficiently impart the operation feeling of 246, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibration device 242, in addition to the sense of operation of the touch panel 246 for the player, it is surprising to be surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B, or suggests timing for operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to enjoy the operation effects by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from the lower side by the plurality of dampers 222, even if an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B by tapping or strongly pressing the touch unit 220B from the upper side, the damper 222 Since it becomes possible to absorb the impact etc., damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A etc. due to the impact etc can be reduced, and the game is interrupted by the damage of the touch unit 220B etc. Can prevent the player's interest from being reduced.

  Further, since the touch panel 246 is used as the portion operated by the touch unit 220B, when the player operates, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the button is pressed. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242 when touching 246, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's finger (hand). Therefore, the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the finger of the player, so that a sufficient feeling of operation can be given, and the player can enjoy the operation of the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, and it becomes possible to cope with various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest by the various effects. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with the touch panel 246, compared with the conventional pressing button, touch, tap (single tap, double tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch out, pinch in), swipe, touch and Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more various operation effects, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) immovably upward and movably downward, and the touch unit 220B is moved by the elastic force (biasing force) of the plurality of dampers 222. Is pressed against the upper moving end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move while operating the touch panel 246, and the touch panel 246 can be easily operated properly. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, it can make the player think that the touch unit 220B does not move, and the touch unit 220B thought to not move is excited according to the gaming state. By vibrating by the device 242, the player can be surprised, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other, for example, by driving the vibration exciter 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player in the touch panel 246 Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 operates a position different from the position to be operated by the player, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player is notified that the operation is wrong. As a result, the player can be made to perform the correct operation, and the enjoyment of the operation using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a plurality of vibration exciters 242 which are separated from each other are provided, the resonance phenomenon is generated at an arbitrary position of the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency and intensity of the vibration of each vibration exciter 242 and the like. Can. Therefore, by controlling each excitation device 242 so that the resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to impart a further operational feeling or greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side and an impact or load acts on the touch unit 220B, both left and right sides of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the damper 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, it is possible to absorb (attenuate) an impact or the like from the upper side to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side by the bending of the damper 222 and the touch unit 220B. Further, on the unit case 231 side, the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the lower mounting base 230, so that an impact or load from the touch unit 220 B side via the unit case 231 can be applied to the mounting base 230. It can be distributed widely and transmitted. At this time, of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving protrusion 231e is inserted at the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e protruding downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 Since a gap is formed between the inner circumferential wall and the inner peripheral wall, the receiving protrusion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward by an impact or a load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, an impact or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230, and the deflection or the like of the unit case 231 transmits the impact or the like to the mounting base 230 in a state where the impact or the like is further attenuated. Since the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the receiving projection 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c abut, the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) impact and load from the side of the mounting base 230 are transmitted in an oblique direction with respect to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, along a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 As a result, the force in the direction (downward) perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting base 230 to be bent is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit or pressed from the upper side, the shocks and the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230, and the touch unit 220B or Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

[3-2. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of a door cover of a door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view with the lid removed and the fal cover unit seen from behind. Furthermore, FIG. 57 is a front view of the fowl cover unit with the lid removed.

  The fowl cover unit 520 of this embodiment is attached to the front of the unit main body 522 and a shallow box-like unit main body 522 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 and open on the front side as shown in the figure. And a flat lid member 524. The foul cover unit 520 is a penetrating ball which penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and brings the normal induction passage 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 into communication with the upper countersink supply port 210a of the plate unit 200. A channel 526, and a full ball receiving opening 528 opened rearward as viewed from the right side of the through ball passage 526 and in communication with a full channel guiding portion 862 of the lower full ball channel unit 860 of the main body frame 4; Is equipped.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 528, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. The ball ball receiving port 530 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball socket 528 and the ball ball socket 530 And a ball discharge port 532 in communication with the lower ball and ball supply port 210c of the plate unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is formed between the full ball receiving hole 528 and the far ball receiving hole 530 and the ball discharging hole 532 by the unit main body 522 and the lid member 524 to store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. A storage passage 533 having a possible size, a flat movable piece 534 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 533 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 522, movable A full tank detection sensor 535 for detecting rotation of the piece 534 in a direction away from the storage passage 533 and a spring 536 biasing the movable piece 534 toward the center of the storage passage 533 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 520, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball discharge port 532 to the lower plate 202 side, they are stored in the storage passage 533 to some extent. Number of game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of gaming balls are stored in the storage passage 533, the movable piece 534 rotates so that the upper end of the movable piece 534 moves away from the storage passage 533 by the weight of the gaming balls. The rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 535. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 535, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 202 be filled up.

  Further, the foul cover unit 520 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 526 on the rear side of the unit main body 522, and a door opening / closing door of the lower full ball passage unit 860 in the dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening and closing contact portion 537 to which the operation projection 863 e of the 863 can abut is provided (see FIG. 80). The door opening and closing contact portion 537 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 537 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guide path door member 863 abuts. When the operation projection 863e of the guide path opening / closing portion 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 537, the guide path door member 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 ) Can be released.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. FIG. 58 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side, and the door frame 3 is closed It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 is attached, which locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the body frame base 600. A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable mounted on the rear side And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 58 to 61, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the shape in front view extends vertically. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  Further, the main unit frame 4 has a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and front and rear in the front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 And a cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a bass speaker of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view And a circular opening for the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forwardly. And have.

  Furthermore, the main body frame 4 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board insertion slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatably attached to the rear end. And a rear extension 608. The body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in a front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge for attaching the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is rotatably mounted at a position slightly lower on the left side from the left and right center of the gaming board placement portion 602 in the opening cover 615 closing the connection opening 606 so as to open and close. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47 to FIG. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the body frame 4.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. In the main frame side upper hinge member 620, a portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates up and down at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the lower hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the lower hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 of the main body lower hinge member 640 are attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main body frame 4 at a portion bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58, 60 and 61. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the operation handle 504 of the handle unit 500 in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 540 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the operation handle 504 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 530 of the lower far cover unit 520 and is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the inside of the far cover unit 520.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting backward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically from the lower part of the unit base 701 forward from the front side And a key cylinder 710 that unlocks locking of either the door frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703 according to the turning direction of the inserted unlocking key.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. 62 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 66 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Also, FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 71 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 71 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. It is. FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the dispensing blade in the dispensing device in an enlarged manner.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 75 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank passage unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 76 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit of the dispensing unit, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-path unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 79 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state . Moreover, FIG. 80 is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. FIG. 81 is an explanatory view showing a guideway opening / closing door of an embodiment different from FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper portion of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 82) swingably suspended from above while guiding the gaming balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Dispensing device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from dispensing unit base 801 and guided by ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the dispensing control substrate housed in dispensing control substrate box 950 And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 201 in the tray unit 200. The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of a full tank induction passage 862 guiding to the full tank reception hole 530, and the front end opening of the normal guidance passage 861 and the full tank guidance passage 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the partition plate 823 penetrate both front and rear ends to the front case 821 and the rear race 822 A rod-like shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece members 825 and 826 rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively And a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821d to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822 e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822 f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822 d to the left and right of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in a state where the ball guide unit 820 is assembled There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b by its own weight. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece front 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left side surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece front 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a row The lower dispensing device 830 can be guided back and forth in two rows by 822 (see FIG. 82). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826, and the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the guide passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825 and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 respectively, and also the movable piece front 825 and the movable Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the single member back 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece front 825 Alternatively, the movable piece 825a, 826a of the movable piece member 826 is rotated so as to protrude into the guiding passage 821c, 822c, and the detection piece 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball is lost is detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 . Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c The weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 and the weight of the weight can be used to attach the movable piece 825a by attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface contacting the gaming ball. , 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guiding path 821c, 822c is provided with the introduction portion 822d for guiding the gaming ball toward the movable piece 825a, 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable piece 825a, 825c protrudes inside. Since the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a by the game balls flowing in the passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, dust, dirt and the like which are pinched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and movable by their own weight etc. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 73. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 837, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831, And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about one third from the upper surface It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right of the front view, and is lower at a height of about one third from the upper surface with respect to the entire height And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The dispensing passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the back box 832 and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840 A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and which can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected with the connection part 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 73). That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. 0 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831 d and 832 d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the dispensing blade 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 821 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 62). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-folded portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blades 839 b and 839 c. In addition, it is not discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A cylindrical portion 843b rotatably attached at its both ends to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer side of the main portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a main portion 843c And a weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 72) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper cylindrical portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832 In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly above the portion bent downward Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 72A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 61 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction on the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passages 381 e and 832 e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, and the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a is located directly below the dispensing outlet 831b of the dispensing device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b is It is located directly below the ball outlet 831 c of the dispenser 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-ball passage unit Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 82).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and can not store the gaming balls, and the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball passage unit 860 is filled with gaming balls, the game is released normally. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue outlet 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 202 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 201 in accordance with the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 201 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 202.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank induction passage 862 for guiding the gaming balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 530 of the door frame 3 from the front end; A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left and can normally close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 537.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate 863c is from below the front end opening of the full induction path 862 at the front end of the lower cover 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full-tan ball passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is a through ball passage 526 in the far cover unit 520 of the door frame 3; It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 537 (see FIG. 80). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 79). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the door cover 3 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end surface of the operation projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863. The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is open (see FIG. 79 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full A through ball passage 526 and a full ball receiving hole 528 of the far cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 526 and the full tank receiving hole 528 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 becomes full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 201. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower tray 202 through the foul cover unit 520. Thereafter, when a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls in addition to the upper plate 201 and can not supply the game balls to the lower plate 202, the foul cover unit 520 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 533 of the Then, when the movable piece 534 is rotated by the game ball being stored in the storage passage 533 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 535, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 534 is detected in the storage passage 533 of the far cover unit 520, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 534 by the full tank detection sensor 535. In the upstream storage passage 533, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

  As described above, in the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment, more gaming balls can be stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 than in conventional pachinko machines, so the main unit When many game balls are stored in the upper full ball path unit 850 and the lower full ball path unit 860 when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, the load of those game balls is normally induced. This largely acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 closing the front end opening of the passage 861 and the full channel guideway 862, and there is a possibility that the guideway opening / closing door 863 is easily broken. Therefore, the guideway opening / closing door 870 of the embodiment as shown in FIG. 81 may be used.

  The guideway opening / closing door 870 shown in FIG. 81 has a disk-like base 870a rotatably mounted, and a first door which extends in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 870a to the upper left side and can usually close the front end opening of the guideway 861. A plate portion 870b, a second door plate portion 870c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 870a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862, and a flat plate extending in the diagonal lower left side from the base portion 870a A protrusion (not shown), and an operation protrusion 870e which protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip of the extension and which can be in contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 537 of the far cover unit 520 in the door frame 3 ing. In addition, the guideway opening / closing door 870 is provided with a plurality of recessed portions 870 in which a part of the game balls are fitted, on the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c.

  The rear faces of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c of the guideway opening / closing door 870 are slanted so as to move rearward as they move away from the base portion 870a as illustrated. Therefore, when the game ball rolled forward in the normal induction passage 861 or full tank induction passage 862 abuts on the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870 b or the second door plate portion 870 c, the inclination of the rear surface By rolling to the side of the base 870a, it is possible to move the gaming balls stored in the normal guide path 861 or the full induction path 862 to the side of the base 870a. Thereby, the load of the game ball stored in the normal induction passage 861 or the full induction passage 862 is the base 870a attached to the lower case 867 in the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. Since the first door plate portion 870 b and the second door plate portion 870 c can not be easily deformed because they act at close positions, the guideway opening / closing door 870 can be hardly damaged and durability can be enhanced.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the plurality of recessed portions 870d of the guide path opening / closing door 870 are held at the positions where the gaming balls approach the base 870a side on the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c. It is arranged as. As a result, the gaming ball having circulated in the normal guiding path 861 or the full guiding path 862 fits in the recess 870d, thereby ensuring that the gaming ball can be brought to the base 870a side, as described above. It is possible to exert an effect.

  Although not shown, the recess 870 d extends in an arc around the base 870 a so that the guideway opening / closing door 870 can rotate even when the gaming ball is fitted.

  In this case, it is desirable to make the width W of the normal induction passage 861 and the right and left width W of the full induction passage 862 different from an integral multiple of the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball, which is in contact with the gaming ball brought to the base 870a side by the rear surface of the first door plate portion 870b and the second door plate portion 870c, is normally the guiding path 861 and the full guiding path. If it is in contact with the left and right outer inner walls of 862, the direction of the load acting from the game ball on the rear side will be directed diagonally forward toward the base 870a side, and the load to the base 870a side attached to the case 867 Can act on a large amount, and the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 58 thru | or FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and having the power supply board housed therein, and the back side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled A payout control board box mounted over the interface control board box 940 in which the boards are housed, the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls inside is housed And 950.

  The payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. FIG. 83 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 89 is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the front component and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view seen from the back showing only the front component and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment has a gaming area 5a in which a gaming ball is struck when the player operates the operation handle 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player's side so as to be visible to the player in the lower left corner of the front component 1000; A central liquid crystal display 1500 attached to the rear side of the display so as to be visible from the front, a peripheral control unit 1600 attached to the rear of the central liquid crystal display 1500, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1100.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 The second start-up port 2004 where the game ball can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the player, and the first start-up port 2002 or the first selected by accepting the game ball to the second start-up port 2004 A lower large winning opening 2005 and an upper large winning opening 2006 are provided which allow the game ball to be accepted in any of the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the start opening unit 2100 mounted immediately above the out opening 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the technique area 5a and having the first start opening 2002, and the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the start opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 mounted along the side and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and mounted to the right of the starting opening unit 2100, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening A frame shape attached to the top of the attacker unit 2300 having the 2004 and the lower large winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300 and having the upper large winning opening 2006 And the center character 2500 of the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like back box 3010 open at the front and a back surface of the back box 3010 and a lock for detachably mounting the central liquid crystal display 1500. A mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 mounted near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 mounted near the lower right front end of the back box 3010.

  In addition, back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 attached to the left of the opening 3010 a on the rear surface of back box 3010, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the rear of lamp drive board 3060, and back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted below the opening 3010a in the rear view of the opening 3010a, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back box 3010 mounted in the lower left corner And a panel relay board 3064.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back up movable rendering unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back lower movable presentation unit 3200 mounted below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable drawing attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the lower back of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and the back of the front movable effect unit 3200 Back-to-back movable production unit 3500 and back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and back-to-back movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001. The stop unit 1006 acts as a buffer member that relaxes and relieves the force of the game ball thrown into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it acts as a buffer member.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 which penetrates in the front and back direction in a portion which becomes the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of mounting openings 1112 (see FIGS. 89 and 90, etc.) are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. Further, in the panel holder 1120, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes are formed on the rear surface.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a can be guided by the out guiding unit 1003 to the out port 1111 on the rear side, and can be discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87).

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board and is attached to the board holder 1200. Have.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game situation), a result of a normal lottery, a result of a special lottery, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, has a status indicator consisting of a single LED for displaying the gaming status, and two regular lottery results to be drawn by passing the game ball to the gate section described later. It was drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port which will be described later, and the normal hold indicator which consists of two LEDs that display the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part. The first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery results, and the first special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending holdings of the game ball to the first starting opening , A second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening described later, and the person in charge of receiving the game ball to the second starting opening When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", etc., the second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending It mainly comprises a round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the open / close pattern.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Central Liquid Crystal Display]
Next, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the central liquid crystal display 1500 is detachably attached to a rear surface substantially at the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5. The central liquid crystal display device 1500 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 includes two left fixing pieces 1501 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side in the front view. And 1502. In the central liquid crystal display device 1500, when the liquid crystal screen is directed to the front, the two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in the front view left side in the frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010 described later After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1501 obliquely from the rear of 3010, move the right fixing piece 1502 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1502 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and slide the locking mechanism downward. Is attached to the back box 3010.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 90. FIG. The peripheral control unit 1600 is attached to the rear of the central liquid crystal display 1500. Although not shown, the peripheral control unit 1600 displays a peripheral control board that controls effects to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board, and displays the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500. A ROM substrate provided with a ROM in which an image display control substrate to be controlled, a production image, a production sound, a production control program and the like are stored, a peripheral control substrate, an image display control substrate and a periphery containing the ROM substrate And a control board box 1620.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 97. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear lower side. FIG. 94 (a) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit from the top front, FIG. 95 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit from the top rear, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. Further, FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the center part of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the center part of the front unit seen from the back.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the rear end penetrates the attachment port 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper special winning opening 2006 are provided, which allow the game ball to be accepted in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are disposed in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed on the lower side from the center in the vertical direction at the right side in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The lower large winning opening 2005 is disposed below the second starting opening 2004 and near the lower end in the game area 5a. The upper large winning opening 2005 is disposed near the upper end in the game area 5a above the second starting opening 2004.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002, and a front view left of the starting port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 and having a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 and to the right of the starting opening unit 2100 one general winning Attached above the attacking unit 2300 having the opening 2001, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the lower large winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attaching unit 2300 And a frame-shaped center character 2500 having a large winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, start port unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, and a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front of the unit base 2101 and projecting forward and forming a first starting opening 2002. A box-shaped front decoration base 2103 attached to the front of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and projecting forward and extending left and right, and the unit base 2101 within the front decoration base 2103 And a front center decoration substrate 2104 attached to the front and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  Also, the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the front of the front decoration base 2103 and has a predetermined decoration and a light emitting decoration by the front center decoration substrate 2104 and a rear side of the unit base 2101. And a guiding passage member 2106 for guiding the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 downward, and a guiding passage member 2106 mounted on the first starting opening 2002 for detecting the gaming ball received And a first starting opening sensor 2107.

  The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in the shape of a container in which the upper side and the rear side are opened, and can receive the game ball from the upper side as the first starting opening 2002 and can guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends equally to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first start port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends in the left and right direction, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape with substantially the same size and shape as the lower large winning opening door member 2352 for opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 described later. ing. The fake unit 2105 a can make the player illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. Side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to a flat unit base 2201 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and attached near the upper edge of the lower front of the unit base 2201. Together with the two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward and forming a general winning opening 2001 and attached to the left from the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit base 2201 and projecting forward and the general winning opening A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decoration substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decoration substrate 2204 so as to cover from the rear And a substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. Further, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201 a inclined downward toward the right at a position on the left and above the portion where the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached It has a protrusion 2201 b protruding to the bottom. The unit base 2201 has translucency, and is decorated to emit light by the side decoration substrate 2204.

  The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in the shape of a container in which the upper side and the rear side are opened, and can receive the game ball from the upper side as the general winning opening 2001 and can guide it backward. The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and is under the second shelf 2203 a and the second shelf 2203 a that are inclined to be lower toward the right on the upper surface It has a ball receiving portion 2203 b which is opened to the upper left on the side and forms a general winning hole 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front is open, and is opened upward at a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2203 b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a bowl-like guiding portion 2205a which extends back and forth and guides the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  With the side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the board cover 2205 is inserted into the attachment port 1112 and the game ball accepted by the general winning hole 2001 is paneled by the guiding portion 2205a It can be guided to the rear of the plate 1112.

5-8 c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed at the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower large winning opening 2005. Specifically, the second start opening 2004 is disposed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the gate unit 2003 is disposed immediately above the second start opening 2004. The lower large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004. The lower large winning opening 2005 extends from the position immediately below the second starting opening 2004 rightward to the left beyond the position directly below the general winning opening 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, and is attached to the unit base 2301 attached from the front to the panel plate 1110, and attached to the upper front of the unit base 2301. A start opening front member 2302 to be decorated, a shelf member 2303 mounted on a front surface of the unit base 2301 between the start opening front member 2302 and the lower large winning opening 2005 and projecting forward, and a unit base 2301 A ball guiding member 2304 mounted on the rear side for guiding the gaming ball received in the second start port 2004, and a gate sensor 2305 mounted on the unit base 2301 for detecting passage of the gate portion 2003 of the gaming ball And.

  In addition, lower attachment decorative board 2306 is disposed at a position corresponding to the position between front starting opening member 2302 and shelf member 2303 on the rear side of unit base 2301 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. And a grid cover in the form of a grid frame mounted between the lower attachment decorative substrate 2306 and the unit base 2301 and the substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 to cover the rear of the lower attachment decorative substrate 2306 And a member (not shown).

  In addition, the attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 to open and close the second start port 2004, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301. And a lower large winning opening unit 2350 for opening and closing the key.

  In the unit base 2301, the gate portion 2003 protrudes forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning hole 2001 protrudes forward from the lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 in a front view. Further, the unit base 2301 is provided with a bowl-shaped hook portion 2301 a for guiding the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. The unit base 2301 is translucent.

  The start opening front member 2302 includes a pair of side wall portions 2302 a (see FIG. 175 (a)) extending forward along the left and right sides of the second start opening 2004 and the upper end of the side wall portion 2302 a on the left in front view. A guiding portion 2302b extending to the left and a flat outer wall portion 2302c extending to the right from the side wall 2302a on the right side of the front view with a distance allowing the game ball to pass through A pair of side wall portions 2302a, a guiding portion 2302b, and a flat plate-like front plate portion 2302d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portions 2302c. The left end of the guiding portion 2302 b extends to the left relative to the gate portion 2003.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a) etc., the shelf member 2303 has an upper surface extending so that the left end is low from immediately below the side wall portion 2302a on the right side of the start opening front member 2302 to directly below the right and left center ing. Accordingly, when the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is released from the left end when the lower large winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the lower large winning opening 2005 is accepted with a very high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the gaming ball received in the second starting opening 2004 between the second starting opening unit 2320 and the lower large winning opening unit 2350 at the rear of the unit base 2301. It is configured to discharge downward after being guided rearward than the unit 2350.

  The second start port unit 2320 has a front case 2321 having a second start port 2004 at its front end and mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and a rear case 2322 mounted on the rear side of the front case 2321 The second start opening door member 2323 and the second start opening door member 2323 which are slidably supported in the front case 2321 so as to be able to project forward and backward forward and backward relative to the second start opening 2004, are driven to slide back and forth A second starting opening sensor 2325 mounted so as to be sandwiched between the starting opening solenoid 2324 mounted in the case 2322 and the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004 And have.

  When the second starting opening unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 passes through the unit base 2301 from the rear and is positioned substantially flush with the front surface of the unit case 2301. Thus, the second start port 2004 opens forward. Then, in the normal state where the starting opening solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321 and the gaming ball flowing down the front of the second starting opening 2004 is the second starting opening It passes downward through the second starting port 2001 without entering 2004. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is in a state of projecting forward than the second starting opening 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down the front of the second start opening 2004, the game ball abuts on the second start opening door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the bottom to the rear, and the second start opening 2004 It is accepted. The gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004 are detected by the second starting opening sensor 2325, and then guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower large winning opening unit 2350 can be opened and closed by a unit case 2351 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and having a rectangular lower large winning opening 2005 extending to the left and right, and the lower large winning opening 2005 A horizontally-long rectangular flat-shaped lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotatably attached to the 2351 and a unit case 2351 are attached and driven to open and close the lower large winning opening door member 2352 in accordance with the game state. Lower large winning opening solenoid 2353, lower large winning opening sensor 2354 attached to unit case 2351 for detecting gaming balls received in lower large winning opening 2005, and lower surface of unit case 2351 attached to upper surface Lower large winning opening decorative board 2355 on which multiple LEDs are mounted and lower large winning opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower large winning opening 2005 opens forward. The lower large winning opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 is rotatably mounted such that the left and right ends of the lower side are pivotable by the unit case 2351, and the upper side is rotated forward and downward. By doing this, it is possible to open the lower large winning opening 2005 from the closed state.

  In the lower large winning opening unit 2350, in the normal state where the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is not energized, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is erected to close the lower large winning opening 2005. Then, when the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the state of being located. That is, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is inclined to be higher from the lower side of the lower large winning opening 2005 to the front.

  In this state, when the gaming ball flows down the front of the lower large winning opening 2005 and abuts against the lower large winning opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from lower to rear due to the inclination of the lower large winning opening door member 2352, It will be accepted by the lower prize winning opening 2005. The gaming balls received in the lower large winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351 after being detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354.

[5-8 d. Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The center role 2500 is arranged slightly above the center of the front view above the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacking unit 2300 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center product 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the inside of the frame. The center role 2500 has an upper prize winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, a part of the lower part of the center product 2500 extends downward between the start opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center character 2500 separates the game area 5a from side to side.

  The center part 2500 is projected forward from the flange portion 2511 in the form of a flat frame like a frame which contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the attachment port 1112 which is widely opened at the center of the panel plate 1112. A frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall 2512 for blocking the game ball from entering the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall 2513 projecting backward from the flange 2511 and inserted into the mounting port 1112 It is equipped with 2510.

  The front peripheral wall 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front circumferential wall 2512 at the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side is the highest.

  In addition, the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which the game balls in the game area 5a can be opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral left lower part of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center base 2510. Warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the lower end near the left end in the frame of the center base 2510, Warp outlet 2523 where the game ball can pass through at the downstream end of warp passage 2521, and Warp outlet 2523 And the stage 2530 for releasing the supplied game balls into the game area 5a while extending horizontally along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and bulging out so that the lowest part is slightly higher There is. The stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and is formed in the central guiding groove 2531 which is notched from the front end to the rear and the two lowest portions. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 which is lowered toward the end and which spreads to the left and right. In a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly below the central guiding groove 2531 and the gaming ball released from the central guiding groove 2531 into the gaming area 5a is extremely likely to have the first probability. Acceptable at the starting port 2002.

  Further, the center character 2500 is attached to the right end of the front peripheral wall 2512 in front view and is brought into contact with the stopper 1006 and rolled back toward the upper game space 2541 to be described later. A unit 2540 is provided. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a separate member from the center character 2500 and attached to the center character 2500 so as to extend the right end portion of the front side of the front circumferential wall 2512 in the front view right direction. Further, the induction portion 2540 is formed of a resin that is stronger than the center part 2500. Specifically, the center part 2500 is formed of PC resin (polycarbonate resin), but the induction part 2540 is formed of POM resin (polyacetal resin) which is more durable than PC resin.

  As described above, when the game ball driven into the game area 5a abuts against the stopper 1006, the gaming ball relaxes its momentum, but some of the game balls are blocked by the stopper 1006 and the front peripheral wall of the center piece 2500. It is bounced back to the upper side of the part 2512. In addition, most players turn the operation handle 504 to the maximum to hit the game ball in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stop portion 1006, so the momentum of the game ball to be hit is to the first starting opening 2002. It is stronger than the usual game which aims at winning a prize. When the game ball thus driven in is bounced back by the stopper 1006, it frequently falls on the upper side of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center combination 2500 and the center combination 2500 may be damaged. Therefore, while attaching the front end right end portion of the top side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 to the center character 2540 as the guiding portion 2540 of another member, the center character 2540 is prevented from breakage by being formed of POM resin excellent in durability ing. In this example, since only the induction portion 2540 is formed of POM resin without forming the entire center part 2540 of POM resin, even if the induction portion 2540 is damaged, only the induction portion 2540 should be replaced. It can be repaired easily, even at the time of breakage.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the guide portion 2540 is attached to the center product 2500 so as to have a level difference with the front peripheral wall portion 2512. In this example, the upper side of the front circumferential wall 2512 is attached above the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 in a front view. As a result, when the gaming ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it will be returned in the direction of the upper game space 2541 without being able to go over the step. In addition, the upper side of the induction portion 2540 has a low coefficient of friction due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game ball which can not go over the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the induction portion 2540 flows down to the upper game space 2541 quickly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to the gaming balls staying on the upper side of the guiding portion 2540.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 176 described later, the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 is formed by a three-dimensional member longer than the right side (right and left sides). The upper side of the guiding portion 2540 needs a certain length or more to receive the game ball bounced back by the stopping portion 1006, but the space in the game area 5a is made equal by making the upper side and the right side (right and left sides) equal. Narrows, and the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine decreases. Therefore, by forming the right side (right and left sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, the space in the vertical direction of the gaming area 5a in the front view is secured to prevent the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the blocking portion 1006 and the upper right entrance where the game ball in the game area 5a is open for entry, and the upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. Along the right side of the center base 2510 from the right end of the front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 and the upper game space 2541 of a predetermined area where the upper big winning opening 2006 is opened on the left side in front view Extending downward and having a lower end bent leftward to allow gaming balls to flow, and a lower right outlet 2543 opening downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the upper portion extends upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in an area where the game ball can move sufficiently in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. In the upper game space 2541, the upper winning prize opening 2006 is opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance. Further, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right in the front view right under the upper right entrance. The guide balls 2541a allow the game balls falling through the upper right entrance to roll along the bottom of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541 and smoothly guide them to the right passage 2542. It can be done.

  The right passage 2542 has a plurality of protrusions 2542a extending in the vertical direction alternately extending in the vertical direction on the front and rear wall surfaces, and the game balls come into contact with the protrusions 2542a to make the game balls flow down Can be attenuated. The lower right outlet 2543 is opened right above the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) also between the lower right outlet 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

  Furthermore, the center prize 2500 includes an upper winning opening door 2550 closing the upper winning opening 2006, and an upper winning opening solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper winning opening door 2550 according to the game state. The upper large winning opening sensor 2552 for detecting gaming balls received in the upper large winning opening 2006 and the rear guiding path 2553 for guiding the gaming balls detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 to the rear than the flange portion 2511 ( 175) and the rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553 and through which gaming balls can pass, and branched from the middle of the rear guiding path 2553 on the right side in a front view of the center base 2510 A relief passage 2555 for guiding the game ball downward along the same, and an outlet 2556 opened at the lower end of the relief passage.

  The upper large winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper large winning opening 2006 opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance in the upper gaming space 2541. The upper large winning opening door member 2550 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the front-back direction in the vicinity of the bottom surface of the upper gaming space 2541 at the lower end on the left side of the upper right entrance It extends to the ceiling of the upper play space. The upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is upright in the normal state and closes the upper winning prize opening 2006. When the upper large winning opening solenoid 2551 is energized according to the gaming state, the upper end is rotated so as to move to the right in front view, and the upper large winning opening 2006 is set so that the gaming ball can be received Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is positioned to the right in a front view than the upper right entrance. Therefore, the game balls dropped to the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance are guided by the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 and accepted in the upper winning prize opening 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper large winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper large winning opening door member 2550, and then to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553 It is induced. The rear discharge port 2554 which is opened at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is usually by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310 a of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the gaming ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the gaming ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. .

  The center character 2500 also includes a front movable presentation unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable presentation unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable movable unit 2560 of the center character 2500 is vertically movably mounted within the frame of the center base 2510 and has a decorative according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and a front movable decorative body 2561, The front movable movable body decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the front side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 And a front driving motor 2563 for raising and lowering the front movable decorative body 2561 according to.

  The table below the center base 2510 is attached to a portion of the lower side of the center base 2510 that extends downward from the stage 2530, and has a flat and translucent surface with a decoration on the front surface. The lower decorative body 2571, and the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 which are rotatably mounted in front of the frontal decorative body 2571, and the rear of the center base 2510 A front drive motor 2575 for rotating the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 attached to the side according to the game state, and the rear side of the front decorative body 2571 And a movable decorative body decoration substrate 2576 mounted on the front side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  In the front movable movable effect unit 2570, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape simulating a shuriken, and are driven by the front lower driving motor 2575. , Each rotate in the same direction.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101. FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In addition, a central liquid crystal display device 1500 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and has a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 The lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lower left front end of the back box 3010, which is received near the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, is guided downward to guide the gaming board The left lower ball passage unit 3030 discharging onto the holder 1200, the game ball installed near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and received by the upper large winning opening 2006 Discharge port 3303a of the lower right lower base 3303 in the lower right left movable effect unit 3300 described later Ball passage unit 3040 for guiding the game balls discharged from the game chamber and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 2556 of the escape passage 2555 of the center member 2500 downward and discharging them onto the substrate holder 1200; And a general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and detecting a game ball received by the general winning opening 2001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a on the back surface of the back box 3010 in a rear view, and the lamp drive board 3060 drives the respective decoration boards based on control commands from the peripheral control board A lamp drive board cover 3061 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the substrate 3060, and a control command from the peripheral control board attached below the back of the opening 3010a A motor drive board 3062 for driving each drive motor based on the motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062; It is attached at the lower left corner and relays the connection between the main control board and each winning opening sensor and each winning opening solenoid etc. That the panel relay board 3064, and a.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back up movable rendering unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back lower movable presentation unit 3200 mounted below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable drawing attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the lower back of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and the back of the front movable effect unit 3200 Back-to-back movable production unit 3500 and back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and back-to-back movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a frame-like liquid crystal mounting which protrudes in a flat shape at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010 a A portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed from the inside to the outside on the right side in rear view in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1501 of the central liquid crystal display 1500 is inserted, and a rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d which is cut away from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side.

  The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size that allows the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Moreover, although the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the boss | hub for attaching each movable presentation unit etc., an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the back box 3010 in the position suitably.

[5-9b. Lower left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The left lower ball passage unit 3030 is attached to the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200. The left lower spherical passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape in which the side extending in the vertical direction is shorter than the side extending in the left and right direction in a front view, and the inside is hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 which are opened forward on the front face and through which the game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding portions 2205 a in the side unit 2200.

  In the lower left ball passage unit 3030, the hollow interior is inclined downward toward the right in the front view, and the gaming balls entering from the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface Ru. A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and the gaming ball entering the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[5-9c. Lower right ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is opened forward and has a first entrance 3041 into which gaming balls received at the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. Of the second entrance 3042 which is open upward and directly below the discharge port 3303a which is open on the lower surface of the lower surface, and the center of the second entrance 3042 which is opened upward in the upper right of the front view And a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 can flow by flowing through the relief passage 2555 of the accessory 2500.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the gaming balls entering the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through the independent paths. In the lower right ball passage unit 3040, a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball entering the first entrance 3041 is attached. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[5-9 d. Back peripheral decoration unit]
Next, the back peripheral decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 98 to 101 and the like. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear side of the C-shaped light transmitting back peripheral decoration member 3081 and the back peripheral decoration member 3081, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 which covers the rear of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear of the back peripheral decoration member 3081.

  The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 can emit light and decorate the back peripheral decoration member 3081 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the front of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel board 1110, and the outside of the center part 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

5-9 e. Back-to-back movable production unit]
Next, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 102 to 116. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the back up movable effect unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. Also, FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper decoration unit of the back up movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the back top decoration unit of the back up movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen. Further, FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back upper sub decoration in the back up movable decoration unit. FIG. 108 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism when the back decoration unit of the back movement movable rendering unit is at the retracted position, and FIG. 109 is a front view of the back decoration unit of the back movement movable rendering unit. FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the appearance position, and FIG. 110 is a front view showing the state of the internal mechanism at the second appearance position of the back decoration unit of the back movable presentation unit.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a front view showing a part of the internal mechanism of the back-up movable effect unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is a perspective view of a part different from (a) in the internal mechanism. (C) is the perspective view which looked at (b) from the back. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the movement of a part of the internal mechanism of the back-up movable effect unit. FIG. 113 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the main members constituting the internal mechanism at the retracted position, and FIG. 113 (b) is a first transmission member rotated from the state of FIG. FIG. 114 (c) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the transmission of rotation to the receiving member is started, and FIG. 114 (c) shows that the first transmitting member is further rotated together with the first transmitting member from the state of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the upper decoration body unit is descend | falling toward a 1st appearance position from a retracted position, and the 1st to-be-transmitted member rotates further with a 1st transmission member from the state of (c). And transmission of the rotation to a 1st to-be-transmitted member is complete | finished, and it is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the back upper decoration unit reached the 1st appearance position.

  Further, in FIG. 115 (e), the second transmission member of the transmission mechanism which has been rotated together with the first transmission member from the state of FIG. 114 (d) is further rotated to transmit the rotation to the second receiving member. It is an explanatory view showing the state where it was started, (f) is the second transmission member from the state of (e) and the second receiving member rotates and the back top decoration unit is from the first appearance position to the second appearance position FIG. 116 (g) is a diagram showing a state in which the second transmission member is rotated together with the second transmission member from the state of (f) of FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the state where the body unit is further descent toward the 2nd appearance position, and it is rotating, and the 2nd to-be-transmitted member further rotates with the 2nd transmission member from the state of (g). Transmission of the rotation to the second receiving member is completed, and the back top decoration unit is at the first appearance position While descending from the state is an explanatory view showing a state that has reached the second occurrence position by half turn.

  The back-up movable rendering unit 3100 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back-up movable effect unit 3100 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 to form a space between the unit base 3101 and the unit base 3101. A rear cover 3102 and a rear upper drive motor 3103 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the vicinity of the right end in the front view and having a rotation axis protruding through the unit base 3101 to between the unit base 3101 And.

  Also, the back up movable effect unit 3100 includes a spur gear drive gear 3104 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back drive motor 3103 and a spur gear first large diameter gear 3105 a engaged with the drive gear 3104. And a first small diameter gear 3105 b that is smaller in diameter than the first large diameter gear 3105 a and integrally rotates with the first large diameter gear 3105 a on the rear side of the first large diameter gear 3105 a. Smaller in diameter than the second large diameter gear 3106a and the second large diameter gear 3106a in the spur gear shape meshing with the first driven gear 3105 disposed on one side and the first small diameter gear 3105b of the first driven gear 3105 And a second small diameter gear 3106b that rotates integrally with the second large diameter gear 3106a on the front side of the second large diameter gear 3106a, and is disposed on the left of the first driven gear 3105 in a front view The first transmission gear 3107 a in a spur gear shape engaged with the second driven gear 3106 and the second small diameter gear 3106 b of the second driven gear 3106 is disposed on the left side of the second driven gear 3106 in a front view And a spur gear-like second transmission gear 3108a meshing with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 and disposed on the left of the first transmission member 3107 in a front view And a second transmission member 3108 (see FIG. 111 (a) etc.).

  The first driven gear 3105, the second driven gear 3106, the first transmission member 3107, and the second transmission member 3108 are rotatable between the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102 by the unit base 3101 and the rear cover 3102. It is attached.

  The first transmission member 3107 is a front surface of a spur gear-like first transmission gear 3107a, and has a columnar first transmission pin 3107b projecting parallel to the rotation axis from near the outer peripheral edge and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3107b. A disk-shaped first lock projection 3107c concentrically projecting forward from the front surface of the first transmission gear 3107a at a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock projection 3107c and the first transmission pin 3107b, From an equal range on both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the first transmission gear 3107a and the center of the first transmission pin 3107b on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock projection 3107c toward the center of the first lock projection 3107c And a first notch 3107d which is notched like a fan.

  The second transmission member 3108 is a front surface of a spur gear-like second transmission gear 3108a, and has a cylindrical second transmission pin 3108b that protrudes forward parallel to the rotation axis from near the outer peripheral edge and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3108b. A disc-shaped second lock projection 3108c concentrically projecting forward from the front surface of the second transmission gear 3108a at a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3108c and the second transmission pin 3108b, From the equal range on both sides of the axis line connecting the center of the second transmission gear 3108a and the center of the second transmission pin 3108b on the outer peripheral surface of the second lock projection 3108c toward the center of the second lock projection 3108c And a second notch 3108 d which is notched like a fan.

  The first transmission gear 3107a and the second transmission gear 3108a of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. The first transmission pin 3107 b and the second transmission pin 3108 b of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same cylindrical diameter and the same revolution radius. The first lock projection 3107 c and the second lock projection 3108 c of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are formed to have the same diameter. Furthermore, the first notches 3107d and the second notches 3108d of the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are 72 degrees to the circumference of the first lock protrusion 3107c and the second lock protrusion 3108c. It is fan-shaped in the angle range.

  Furthermore, the back-up movable rendering unit 3100 has a columnar slide shaft 3109 having a lower end attached to the unit base 3101 at the front near the left end in front view of the unit base 3101 and extending vertically, and the upper end of the slide shaft 3109 A shaft attachment member 3110 attached to the front of the unit base 3101; a left slider 3111 having a flat detection piece 3111a slidably attached to the upper and lower sides by a slide shaft 3109 and extending rearward; The upper rear elevation sensor 3112 attached to the unit base 3101 by detecting the detection piece 3111a of the left slider 3111 and the upper front surface of the unit base 3101 are attached on the front view left with respect to the rear upper drive motor 3103 , Lower end is unit base 310 A rail bracket 3113 extending upward and downward so as to project downward from the lower surface of the lower surface, a slide rail 3114 attached to the left side surface of the rail bracket 3113 in front view and having a right slider 3114 a sliding up and down A rack member 3115 attached to the right slider 3114a of the rail 3114 and having a rack gear 3115a extending vertically, and a flat plate-like first movable member attached to the left slider 3111 and the rack member 3115 at both left and right ends. And a base 3116.

  In addition, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is a flat first substrate portion 3117a formed in the form of a drop, and a cylindrical first protrusion projecting forward from the tip of the drop in the first substrate portion 3117a. The action pin 3117 b is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 so that the first action pin 3117 b revolves at a position on the front side of the first transmission member 3107 on the front surface of the unit base 3101 in a front view. A first receiving member 3117 to which rotation of the first transmitting member 3107 can be transmitted, and a first bearing slit 3118a to which the first action pin 3117b of the first receiving member 3117 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction And a bearing member 3118 attached to the rear surface of the first movable base 3116.

  The first movable base 3116 has an opening 3116 a which penetrates in the back and forth direction and extends from the lower end to near the center in the vertical direction. On the rear surface of the first movable base 3116, a rack member 3115 is attached to the right of the opening 3116a in a front view. The rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 extends along the opening 3116a with the tip of the rack 3115a facing left in front view.

  The first movable base 3116 is mounted to be vertically slidable (liftable) by the slide shaft 3109 and the slide rail 3114 via the left slider 3111 and the right slider 3114 a. Further, the position of the first movable base 3116 in the vertical direction is restricted by the first action pin 3117 b of the first driven member 3117 inserted into the first bearing slit 3118 a of the bearing member 3118. Therefore, when the first receiving member 3117 is rotated and the first action pin 3117b is revolved to change the position of the first action pin 3117b in the vertical direction, the first action pin 3117b runs in the first bearing slit 3118a. The first movable base 3116 slides in the vertical direction while sliding in the lateral direction. That is, when the first power receiving member 3117 is rotated, the first movable base 3116 slides up and down.

  The first base portion 3117a of the first member to be transferred 3117 has a base circle whose shape in a front view is substantially the same as the root diameter of the gear teeth of the second large diameter gear 3106a of the second driven gear 3106, and its base circle It is formed in the shape (what is called, drop-like) mainly comprised by two sides extended so that it might contact from the outer side of. The first member to be transferred 3117 has a center of rotation of a base circle of the first base portion 3117 a, and the center of rotation is coaxially arranged with the center of the second driven gear 3106. The first action pin 3117 b protrudes from the vicinity of the two sides in contact with the base circle in the first substrate portion 3117 a (the tip of the droplet).

  The first member to be transferred 3117 has the same diameter as the base circle of the first substrate portion 3117a, and has a cylindrical first member to be transferred 3117c projecting backward from the rear surface of the first substrate portion 3117a, and the first member to be transferred A first transmission slit 3117d which is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 3117c and into which the first transmission pin 3107b is slidably inserted, and a first transmission slit 3117d on the outer peripheral surface of the first power receiver main body 3117c And a pair of first lock recesses 3117e which are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The first lock recess 3117 e is recessed in a circular arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock projection 3107 c of the first transmission member 3107. In addition, the pair of first lock recesses 3117e are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first power receiving member 3117 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state in which the first transferable member 3117 is assembled with the back-up movable effect unit 3100, the first transfer main body 3117c includes the first transfer pin 3107b and the first lock protrusion 3107c of the first transfer member 3107; The position in the front and back direction is the same. Thus, the first transmission pin 3107b can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3170b and the first transmission slit 3117d. In addition, a part of the first lock projection 3107c can be inserted into the first lock recess 3117e, and a part of the first lock projection 3107c is inserted into the first lock recess 3117e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3117 can be restricted (locked).

  In addition, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 has a second bearing slit 3119a penetrating in the front and back direction and extending in the left and right direction, and a bearing hole 3119b penetrating in the front and rear direction substantially at the center A second movable base 3119 slidably mounted on the rear surface of the first movable base 3116 so that the bearing hole 3119b faces forward from the opening 3116a, and the first movable base 3116 And has a shaft portion 3151a rotatably inserted into the bearing hole 3119a of the second movable base 3119, and a back upper decoration body imitating a head including the face of a predetermined character along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 It is attached to the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a of the back top decoration unit 3150 that penetrates the unit 3150 and the second movable base 3119. A spur gear-like decorative body rotating gear 3120 meshing with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115, and a flat gear mounted on the rear surface of the second movable base 3119 so as to cover the rear of the decorative body rotating gear 3120 And a cover 3121.

  When the second movable base 3119 is slid relative to the first movable base 3116, the back upper decoration unit 3150 attached to the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119 is also combined with the second movable base 3119. Slide on. At this time, since the decorative body rotational gear 3120 attached to the shaft portion 3151a of the back upper surface decoration unit 3150 is engaged with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, When the two movable base 3119 slides, the decoration rotating gear 3120 rotates with the back decoration unit 3150.

  Furthermore, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3101 below the second transmission member 3108 in front view and in front of the unit base 3101 so that the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 can be transmitted. A second driven member 3122 in the second direction, a rotary link member 3123 slidably mounted in a direction along the rotation plane on the front side of the second driven member 3122, and a second driven member on the front side of the rotary link member 3123 It is slidably mounted in a direction intersecting the sliding direction with respect to 3122 and rotatably mounted behind the first movable base 3116, and protrudes rearward from a position eccentric to the rotation center, and A cylindrical second action pin 312 slidably inserted into the second bearing slit 3119a of the two movable base 3119 Includes a second movable base driving member 3124 to have a, a shaft member 3125 are rotatably mounted relative to the second movable base driving member 3124 first movable base 3116, a.

  The second driven member 3122 includes a disk-shaped second substrate portion 3122 a rotatably mounted on the unit base 3101 and a cylindrical second driven main portion 3122 b projecting rearward from the periphery of the second substrate portion 3122 a. A second transmission slit 3122c which is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the second power receiving main body 3122b and into which the second transmission pin 3108b is slidably inserted; and the outer peripheral surface of the second power receiving main body 3122b On both sides of the second transmission slit 3122c in the pair, a pair of second lock recesses 3122d recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center, and the back of the second base portion 3122a And a groove-shaped first transmission guide portion 3122e which extends at a right angle and has one end opened to the outer peripheral surface of the second substrate portion 3122a. (See, etc. FIG. 111 (b) and (c)).

  The second driven member 3122 has a radius of the second substrate portion 3122a (the second driven body portion 3122b) shorter than the distance from the rotation center to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and the second lock protrusion It is formed longer than the distance to the outer peripheral surface of 3108 c. The second lock recess 3122 d is recessed in an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock projection 3108 c of the second transmission member 3108. Further, the pair of second lock concave portions 3122 d are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second power receiving member 3122 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  The first guiding and transmitting portion 3122 e extends at an angle of 54 degrees with respect to the direction in which the second transmitting slit 3122 c extends. In addition, the first guide transmission unit 3122e opens in the circumferential surface in the opposite direction to the direction in which the second transmission slit 3122c is open in the circumferential surface.

  The rotating link member 3123 is a flat plate-like plate that protrudes from the flat surface of the link body 3123a and the rear surface of the link body 3123a and is slidably inserted into the first transmission guide 3122e of the second power receiving member 3122 A pair of first receiving guide portions 3123b, a front projection 3123c projecting from the front surface of the link body portion 3123a, and a first receiving guide portion 3123b extending backward from the front surface of the front protrusion 3123c And a groove-shaped second transmission guide portion 3123 d extending in a direction intersecting with the direction in which the both ends are open on the outer peripheral surface of the front projection 3123 c (FIGS. c) etc.).

  The pair of first receiving guide portions 3123 b of the rotating link member 3123 are provided symmetrically with respect to an axis passing through the center of the link main body 3123 a and provided eccentrically from the center. The second transmission guide 3123 c is provided on an axis passing through the center of the link body 3123 a. The first receiving guide 3123 b and the second transmitting guide 3123 c extend in a direction intersecting at an angle of 95 degrees.

  The second movable base drive member 3124 projects rearward from a position where the second action pin 3124a is eccentric to the rotation center, and is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116, and a drive main body 3124b A second receiving guide projecting rearward from the rear surface of the portion 3124b and passing through the rotation center and extending at a right angle to the rotation axis and slidably inserted in the second transmitting guide 3123d of the rotating link member 3123 3124c (see FIG. 111 (b) and (c) etc.).

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 and the like, the back top decoration unit 3150 has a decoration base 3151 having a flat plate-like shaft portion 3151 a projecting cylindrically from the center of the rear surface, and a decoration base 3151. Attached to the front of the decorative base 3151 and three oval imitation of the head of a given character, and attached to the front of the decorative base 3151. And a C-shaped back-to-back decoration substrate 3153 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface.

  In addition, the back surface decoration unit 3150 is disposed at the rear of the back surface decoration body 3152 substantially at the center of the front surface of the decoration body base 3151 and extends in the left and right direction. A pair of shaft brackets 3155 are mounted on the front surface of the decorative body base 3151, and guide slits 3154a are mounted so as to be guided to the left and right by the guide shaft 3154 and extend vertically at the center lower portion in the left and right direction. A flat sub-sublayer slider 3156 and a front surface of the sub-sublayer slider 3156 are attached to the front and close a pair of openings 3152 a of the back upper decoration 3152 and have an oval shape at the portion facing the opening 3152 a The back decoration secondary decoration 3157 to which the decoration 3157a of the second is applied, and the back decoration behind the back decoration secondary decoration 3157 Includes a backing on a secondary decorative substrate 3158 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the front surface of the decorative body slider 3156 is mounted, the.

  Furthermore, the back top decoration unit 3150 is attached to the back top sub drive motor 3159 and the back top sub drive motor 3159 that are mounted so that the rotation axis extends horizontally in the vicinity of the front lower end of the top base 3151. It extends along the outer peripheral surface of the worm gear 3160 and the disk-shaped main body portion 3161a rotatably mounted on the decorative body base 3151 above the worm gear 3156, and engages with the worm gear 3160. Gear part 3161b, an extension piece 3161c extending to the rear of the slider 3156 for auxiliary decoration from the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the gear part 3161b in the main body part 3161a, and a front end from the tip of the extension piece 3161c It is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3156 a of the sub decoration slider 3156 Columnar slide pin 3161D, a gear member 3161 that has a, and a.

  In the back surface decoration unit 3150, the two openings 3152a of the back surface decoration 3152 form the outer periphery of the eye of a predetermined character, and the sub surface of the back surface sub decoration 3157 facing forward from the two openings 3152a. The decoration 3157a forms a pupil. The back surface decoration 3152 and the back surface sub decoration 3157 have translucency, and are lighted and decorated by the LEDs of the back surface decorative substrate 3153 and the back surface sub decoration substrate 3158 disposed behind each of them. .

  As shown in the figure, in the back top decoration unit 3150, in the normal state, the head of the predetermined character being scooped by the back top decoration 3152 is in a state where the top and bottom are reversed. In addition, the back upper decoration unit 3150 can slide the back upper auxiliary decoration 3157 to the left and right with respect to the back upper decoration 3152 by rotational driving of the back upper auxiliary drive motor 3159. As a result, it is possible to perform a movable effect in which the pupil (sub decoration 3157a) of the predetermined character being scooped up by the back surface decoration body 3152 is reciprocated from side to side.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back-up movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. First, the operation of the back upper sub decoration 3157 in the back top decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the normal state, the extension piece 3161c of the gear member 3161 is attached in a state of extending vertically upward. In this state, the slider for auxiliary decoration 3156 is located approximately at the center of the slide range extending to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface of the slider for auxiliary decoration 3156. A decoration 3157 a is located approximately at the center of the two openings 3152 a of the back surface decoration 3152. That is, in the normal state, the predetermined character being scolded by the back surface decoration body 3152 is looking at the front.

  In this normal state, for example, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the right side view by the back and top auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b is engaged with the worm gear 3160 by the gear portion 3161b. It rotates in the clockwise direction, and the sliding pin 3161d located above the rotation center revolves to move leftward. As the sliding pin 3161d slides downward in the guiding slit 3156a due to the revolving movement of the sliding pin 3161d to the left, the sliding pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guiding slit 3156a to the left, and the sub decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the left. As a result, the sub decoration 3157a moves to the left, so that the predetermined character crawled by the back top decoration 3152 is looking to the left (see FIG. 107 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the worm gear 3160 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the right side view by the back-up auxiliary drive motor 3159, the gear member 3161b is engaged with the worm gear 3160 and rotates the gear member 3161 in the clockwise direction. The sliding pin 3161d positioned above the rotation center revolves to move to the right. The rightward sliding movement of the slide pin 3161d causes the slide pin 3161d to slide downward in the guide slit 3156a, and the slide pin 3161d presses the inner surface of the guide slit 3156a to the right, and the sub decoration The body slider 3156 slides to the right. As a result, the sub decoration 3157a moves to the right, so that the predetermined character being scooped by the back top decoration 3152 is looking to the right (see FIG. 107 (c)).

  As described above, since the sub decoration 3157a can be moved to the left and right by the rotational driving of the back upper sub drive motor 3159, a predetermined character being scolded by the back upper decoration 3152 can be seen according to the gaming state It is possible to perform a movable effect in which the direction of movement changes. In addition, by reciprocating the sub decoration 3157a to the left and right, it is also possible to perform moving effect to make the eyes of the predetermined character being scolded by the back surface decoration body 3152 to make it possible to perform various motion effects. can do.

  Subsequently, the lifting and lowering operation of the back-up decoration unit 3150 in the back-up movable effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The back-up movable effect unit 3100 of this embodiment can raise and lower the back-up decoration unit 3150 and can rotate the back-up decoration unit 3150 by 180 degrees.

  First, the internal mechanism of the back-up movable effect unit 3100 for raising and lowering the back-up decoration unit 3150 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 108 and 111 and the like, a rear upper driving motor 3103 having a rotation axis in the front-rear direction is disposed at the right end in front view. The rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 engaged with the drive gear 3104 attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper drive motor 3103 is disposed at the lower left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the drive gear 3104. The rotation center of the second driven gear 3106 meshing with the first driven gear 3105 is disposed at substantially the same height as the rotation center of the drive gear 3104 at the upper left of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first driven gear 3105 There is. In addition, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 having the first transmission gear 3107 a meshing with the second driven gear 3106 is the rotation of the first driven gear 3105 at the lower left in front view with respect to the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106. It is placed at about the same height as the center. Furthermore, the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108 having the second transmission gear 3108a that meshes with the first transmission gear 3107a of the first transmission member 3107 is the first upper left with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107 in front view. It is disposed at a position higher than the rotation center of the second driven gear 3106.

  Further, the rotation center of the first transmission member 3117 to which the rotation from the first transmission member 3106 is transmitted is coaxial with the second driven gear 3106 at the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3106 It is placed in position. On the other hand, the rotation center of the second driven member 3122 to which the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is slightly left of the front view directly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108. It is arranged at a position lower than the rotation center. The rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 to which the rotation of the second driven member 3122 is transmitted is disposed on an axis extending vertically vertically through the rotation center of the second driven member 3122.

  In the normal state, the back upper decoration unit 3150 is located at the rising end in the upper and lower lifting range, and the top and bottom of a predetermined character crawled by the back upper decoration 3152 is reversed. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 etc., most of the back-to-back decoration unit 3150 is located behind the center part 2500, and only a small part is a frame of the center part 2500. It can be viewed from the player side through the inside. That is, the back-upper decoration unit 3150 is located at the retracted position where it can hardly be seen from the player side in the normal state.

  When the back top decoration unit 3150 is in the retracted position, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 113 (a) etc., the first transmission pin 3107b of the first transmission member 3107 is frontal to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107. The second transmission pin 3108 b of the second transmission member 3108 is located at the upper left (the position inclined approximately 27 degrees leftward from the vertical line), and the front right upper (with respect to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108) It is located at a position inclined approximately 13 degrees to the right from the vertical line). Further, at the retracted position, the first action pin 3117 b of the first power receiving member 3117 is a position where the front left upper side (the position inclined about 45 degrees leftward from the vertical line) with respect to the rotation center of the first power receiving member 3117 And the first transmission slit 3117d of the first driven member 3117 is at a smaller angle to the horizontal than the axis connecting the first action pin 3117b from the center of rotation (approximately 72 with respect to the vertical). Extends towards the top left of the front view at an angle of

  Further, at the retracted position, the second transmission slit 3122c of the second driven member 3122 extends from the rotation center toward the upper left in a front view (an angle of about 36 degrees from the vertical line to the left). In addition, the second movable base drive member 3124 has a rotation center located above the rotation center of the second power receiving member 3122 and slightly below the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108, and has a second action. The pin 3124 a is located on the upper right of the front view with respect to the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 (a position inclined about 45 degrees to the right from the vertical line).

  Furthermore, at the retracted position, the first lock projection 3107 c of the first transmission member 3107 is inserted into the first lock recess 3117 e on one side (the one closer to the rotation center of the first transmission member 3107) of the first transmission member 3117. ing. As a result, since the rotation of the first power receiving member 3117 is restricted (locked), the first movable base 3116 does not slide up and down. In addition, the second lock projection 3108 c of the second transmission member 3108 is inserted into the second lock recess 3122 d on one side of the second transmission member 3122 (one closer to the rotation center of the second transmission member 3108). As a result, since the rotation of the second power receiving member 3122 is restricted (locked), the second movable base drive member 3124 does not rotate, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide up and down.

  Further, when the back top decoration unit 3150 is at the retracted position, the back up and down elevation detection sensor 3112 detects a detection piece 3111 a of the left slider 3111 to which the first movable base 3116 is slidably attached vertically.

  When the back-up decoration unit 3150 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction of the front view by the back-up drive motor 3103 with the back-up decoration unit 3150 in the retracted position, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 The first transmission member 3107 rotates in the clockwise direction via the second driven gear 3106 and the second transmission member 3108 rotates in the counterclockwise direction at the same speed. Then, first, the first transmission pin 3107d of the first transmission member 3107 starts to enter the first transmission slit 3117d of the first power receiving member 3117 (see FIG. 113 (b)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction, the notched portion 3107d is rotated to the position of the first lock recess 3117e. The first lock projection 3107c is released from the inside of the first lock recess 3117e, and the first transmission pin 3107b abuts on the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3117d to press the first transmission slit 3117d downward. Thus, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first power receiving member 3117, and the first power receiving member 3117 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. At this time, the first notched portion 3107d is located at the portion of the first lock concave portion 3117e, and the first lock projection 3107c is detached from the inside of the first lock concave portion 3117e (the lock is released). Therefore, the first receiving member 3117 is rotated without blocking the rotation by the first lock projection 3107c (see FIG. 114 (c)).

  The first receiving member 3117 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, whereby the first action pin 3117 b revolves downward and the first action pin 3117 b is slidably inserted. The first movable base 3116 slides downward through the single bearing slit 3118a. Since the back top decoration unit 3150 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back top decoration unit 3105 also slides downward together with the first movable base 3116.

  When the first movable base 3116 slides downward, the second transmission guide portion 3123 d of the rotating link member 3123 extends vertically, and therefore, is attached to the first movable base 3116 and the second transmission guide portion 3123 d. The second movable base drive member 3214 having the second receiving guide 3124c guided to the bottom can move downward together with the first movable base 3116, and the first movable base 3116 slides smoothly.

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first transmission pin 3107b is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3117d. The lock protrusion 3107 c enters into the other first lock recess 3117 e different from the first lock recess 3117 e in which the first lock protrusion 3107 c was originally inserted. Thereby, the rotation of the first power receiving member 3117 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the first movable base 3116 is stopped (see FIGS. 109 and 114 (d)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 is located at the lower end of the elevating range, and the back top decoration unit 3150 is located at the first appearance position. Further, in the first transmission member 3107, the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3107b is inserted into the first transmission slit 3117d of the first power receiving member 3117 is a first specific rotation range.

  In the state where the back surface decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, in the state where the top and bottom are reversed similarly to the state of the retraction position, as shown in FIG. , From the inside of the center character 2500 to the player side. In the state of the first appearance position, since the pair of openings 3152a of the back surface decoration 3152 and the sub decoration 3157a facing the inside of the opening 3152a can be partially viewed from the player side, In this way, it is possible to present a movable effect such that the predetermined character being scooped by the back surface decoration body 3152 looks upside down from above.

  When the back surface decoration unit 3150 is in the first appearance position, the second transmission pin 3108 b of the second transmission member 3108 rotating with the first transmission member 3107 is the second transmission of the second driven member 3122. It has not reached the slit 3122c. Further, the rotation center of the second movable base drive member 3124 attached to the first movable base 3116 is located below the rotation center of the second power receiving member 3122, and the second of the rotation link member 3123 Only the upper part of the second receiving guide 3124 c of the second movable base driving member 3124 is guided with respect to the transferring guide 3123 d.

  The drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the back appearance decoration unit 3150 in the first appearance position, and the first transmission member 3107 is further rotated in the clockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 Is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the first transmission pin 3107b moves away from the first transmission slit 3117d, and the second transmission pin 3108b enters the second transmission slit 3122c of the second driven member 3122. (See FIG. 115 (e)).

  Then, when the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction and the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the second notch 3108d is rotated to the position of the second lock recess 3122d. The second lock projection 3108c is removed from the second lock recess 3122d, and the second transmission pin 3108b abuts the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3122c to press the second transmission slit 3122c rightward in a front view. Thereby, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second receiving member 3122 so that the second receiving member 3122 rotates clockwise in a front view. At this time, the second notch 3108d is located at the second lock recess 3122d, and the second lock projection 3108c is detached (locked) from the second lock recess 3122d. Therefore, the second driven member 3122 is rotated without blocking the rotation by the second lock projection 3108c (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  Since the first transmission guide portion 3122e formed on the front surface of the second transmission member 3122 also rotates when the second transmission member 3122 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first transmission guide portion 3122e The rotating link member 3123 having the first receiving guide 3123 b slidably guided also tries to rotate in the same clockwise direction. On the other hand, the upper part of the second receiving guide 3124 c of the second movable base drive member 3124 rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 slides on the second transmission guide 3123 d of the front surface of the rotating link member 3123 It is guided as possible. Thus, when it is attempted to rotate the rotating link member 3123 in the clockwise direction by the first power receiving member 3122, the second transmission guiding portion 3123 d also tries to rotate, and the second transmission guiding portion 3123 d and the second power transmitting guide The second movable base drive member 3124 tries to revolve around the rotating link member 3123 via the portion 3124c.

  However, since the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116 and can not revolve around the rotating link member 3123, the force acting on the second transmission guide portion 3124c On the contrary, the rotational link member 3123 tries to revolve around the second movable base drive member 3124 by the reaction force of. At this time, the rotating link member 3123 intersects the extending direction (first direction) of the first transmission guide portion 3122 e and the extending direction of the second transmission guide portion 3123 d (the first direction crosses the first direction). The rotary link member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction so that the force acting on the rotary link member 3123 can be reduced since it can slide in the second direction extending in the direction). It becomes. Thus, the rotation of the first driven member 3122 is transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 by the rotation of the rotation link member 3123 and the slide in the first direction and the second direction, and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front (see FIGS. 115 (f) to 116 (h)).

  In other words, the rotation link member 3123 is forcibly rotated by the second power receiving member 3122 by the first transmission guide portion 3122 e and the first power receiving guide portion 3123 b. When the rotation link member 3123 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second transmission guide portion 3123 d extending vertically in FIG. 115 (e) is inclined to rotate so that the upper end moves to the right. (See FIG. 115 (f)). When the second transmission guide portion 3123 d is rotationally inclined, the second movable base drive member 3124 tries to revolve via the second receiving guide portion 3124 c guided by the second transmission guide portion 3123 d. Since the base drive member 3124 is attached to the first movable base 3116 and can not revolve, the reaction force of the force acting from the rotation link member 3123 to the second movable base drive member 3124 causes the rotation link member 3123 to perform the first transmission. While sliding largely to the side (right side in front view) opened along the guide portion 3122e, the slide slightly along the second transmission guide portion 3123d to the rotation center side (downward) of the second movable base drive member 3124 The second movable base drive member 3124 rotates at the same angle as the angle at which the second transmission guide 3123 d is inclined.

  When the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates clockwise in a front view, the second action pin 3124 a revolves to move downward, so the second action pin 3124 a is slidably inserted. The second movable base 3119 slides downward via the second bearing slit 3119a. Since the back top decoration unit 3150 is attached to the second movable base 3119, the back top decoration unit 3105 slides along with the second movable base 3119 further downward from the first appearance position. At this time, the back surface decoration unit 3150 is rotatably mounted by the shaft portion 3151a and the bearing hole 3119b of the second movable base 3119, and the decoration body rotation mounted at the rear end of the shaft portion 3151a. Since the gear 3120 meshes with the rack gear 3115a of the rack member 3115 attached to the first movable base 3116, when the second movable base 3119 slides downward, the back top decoration along with the decoration rotating gear 3120 The unit 3150 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front (see FIG. 115 (f) and the like).

  When the drive gear 3104 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction, and the second driven member 3122 is further rotated in the clockwise direction via the second transmission member 3108, the rotating link member 3123 and the second driven member 3122 While rotating in the clockwise direction at the same angle, and further sliding to the open side along the first transmission guide 3122e, the center of the rotary link member 3123 is movable along the second transmission guide 3123d as the second movable Sliding toward the center of rotation of the base drive member 3124 further rotates the second movable base drive member 3124 in the clockwise direction. As a result, the back top decoration unit 3150 slides further downward together with the second movable base 3119, and the back top decoration unit 3150 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 116 (g)).

  Then, when the second transmission member 3108 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction by further rotating the drive gear 3104 in the counterclockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3108 b is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3122 c and the second lock is performed. The protrusion 3108 c enters another second lock recess 3122 d different from the second lock recess 3122 d in which the second lock protrusion 3108 c was originally inserted. Thereby, the rotation of the second power receiving member 3122 is stopped, and the downward sliding of the second movable base 3199 is stopped, and the up-and-down position is 180 degrees with respect to the back appearance decoration unit 3150 at the first appearance position. It stops in the rotated state (refer FIG. 110 and FIG. 116 (h)). In this state, the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are at the same time located at the lower end of the lifting range, and the back top decoration unit 3150 is at the second appearance position. . Further, in the second transmission member 3108, the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3108b is inserted into the second transmission slit 3122c of the second driven member 3122 is a second specific rotation range.

  When the back surface decoration unit 3150 (back surface decoration body 3152) is in the second appearance position, the second lock projection 3108c of the second transmission member 3108 is in the second lock recess 3122d of the second power receiving member 3122 Since it is inserted, the rotation of the second receiving member 3122 is prevented, and the second movable base 3119 does not slide further downward. Also, when the back surface decoration unit 3150 is in the second appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being scooped by the back surface decoration body 3152 is in a normal state, and The upper decorative body 3152 is positioned substantially in the center of the center character 2500, and substantially the entire rear upper decorative body 3152 can be viewed from the player.

  When the back-up decoration unit 3150 is lowered from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the back-up movable effect unit 3100 is lowered while rotating the back-up decoration 3152 which has been reversed upside down while rotating 180 degrees. Can present to the player a movable effect located substantially in the center of the frame of the center character 2500 (the front of the central liquid crystal display 1500) in a normal state, and the player is greatly surprised. Can.

  When the drive gear 3104 is rotated by the drive motor 3103 in the range direction (clockwise direction as viewed from the front) with the drive motor 3103 at the second appearance position with the back unit 3150 at the second appearance position, the back unit 3150 is rotated. Moves up to the retraction position through the first appearance position while the reverse motion is performed, and when the detection piece 3111 a of the left slider 3111 is detected by the back up and down elevation detection sensor 3112, the drive gear by the back up drive motor 3103 When the rotation of 3104 is stopped, the back top decoration unit 3150 returns to the retracted position.

  The back-up movable effect unit 3100 can raise and lower the back-up decoration unit 3150 in two steps from the retracted position to the first appearance position and further from the first appearance position to the second appearance position. Since the back upper sub decoration 3157 (the sub decoration 3157a) can be slid to the left and right (in the direction perpendicular to the top and bottom direction of the back top decoration 3152) with respect to the back top decoration 3152 separately By combining the above, it is possible to present a variety of movable effects.

[5-9 f. Back lower front movable production unit]
Next, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower front movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit front back lower movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 118 (a) is an explanatory view showing the back lower front first decorative body and the back lower front second decorative body of the back lower front movable effect unit from the front in a state of a normal retraction position, (b) These are explanatory drawings which show a back bottom front 1st decoration body and a back bottom front 2nd decoration body of a back bottom front movable presentation unit from the front in the state of an appearance position.

  The back lower front movable effect unit 3200 is disposed below the opening 3101 a near the front end in the back box 3010. The back bottom front movable effect unit 3200 is attached to a flat unit base 3201 attached to the front surface of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500, and to the upper left corner in a front view on the back surface of the unit base 3201 It is meshed with the drive motor 3202 that protrudes forward through the 3201 and the drive gear 3203 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3202, and the drive gear 3203 from the lower right in front view. A transmission gear 3204 rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 and a pinion gear 3205 meshing with the transmission gear 3204 from the lower right of the front view and rotatably attached to the unit base 3201 are provided.

  In addition, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 has a rack gear 3206a meshing with the pinion gear 3205 from the right in front view and extending vertically, and a flat detection piece 3206b protruding right in front view. The rack member 3206 is mounted slidably on the unit base 3201 in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the front of the unit base 3201. The drive gear 3203, the transmission gear 3204, the pinion gear 3205, and the rack member 3206 A unit cover 3207 that covers from the front and a back lower front movable detection sensor 3208 that is attached to the unit cover 3207 and that can detect the detection piece 3206 b of the rack member 3206 are provided.

  Further, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 has a link pin 3209a cylindrically projecting rearward from a position between the center in the left and right direction in the front view and the left end, and the left end in the front view is the upper end of the rack member 3206 First transparent body 3209 having a three-dimensional decoration and a first decorative body 3209 with three-dimensional decoration on which the right end in the front view is slidably attached vertically to the unit base 3201; Back-to-front first decorative substrate 3210 attached to the back surface of the single decorative body 3209 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a strip-like base end first back-to-back first decorative body 3209 and unit base The link pin 32 is attached to the unit base 3201 and the unit cover 3207 rotatably around the center of the unit base 3201 in the left-right direction between 3201 and 3201. A link member 3211 having an arc-like extended link slit 3211a into which the slide member 9a is slidably inserted, and a tip end portion of the link member 3211 attached to the tip of the link member 3211 to simulate a hand of a predetermined character A second decorative body 3212 and a lower front second decorative substrate 3213 attached to the back surface of the back lower second decorative body 3212 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

  Subsequently, the operation of the first lower back decoration 3209 and the second lower back decoration 3212 in the lower back movable presentation unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the normal state, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 is lowered with respect to the rack member 3206 to which the first lower back decoration 3209 is attached and the upper and lower slide directions. A link member 3211 that is located at the end and to which the back lower front second decoration 3212 is attached extends obliquely so that the tip is located slightly upward with respect to the horizontal.

  In this state, the first lower back decoration 3209 and the second lower back decoration 3212 are positioned lower than the frame of the center character 2500 and can not be viewed from the player (see FIG. See 83). That is, in the normal state, the first lower back decoration 3209 and the second lower back decoration 3212 are in the retracted position where they can not be seen by the player. When the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the retracted position, the detection piece 3206 b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208.

  When the back lower front drive motor 3202 rotates the drive gear 3203 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view in the normal state, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 rotates the pinion gear 3205 in the counterclockwise direction, The rack member 3206 is raised by the rack gear 3206a engaged with the pinion gear 3205. Since the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is attached to the upper end of the rack member 3206, the back lower front first decorative body 3209 is also lifted together with the rack member 3206.

  Since the link pin 3209a inserted in the link slit 3211a of the link member 3211 also rises when the back lower front decoration 3209 ascends, the link pin 3209a presses the inner surface of the link slit 3211a upward while the link slit 3211a is pressed. The inside slides, and the link member 3211 rotates clockwise in a front view centering on the proximal end. And since the back lower front second decoration body 3212 is attached to the tip of the link member 3211, the back lower front second decoration body 3212 is moved upward with the rise of the back back front first decoration body 3209. Rotate to move.

  Thereafter, when the rack member 3206 reaches the rising end, the rotation of the back lower front drive motor 3202 is stopped, and the rising of the back lower front first decoration 3209 is stopped, and the rotation of the back lower second decoration 3212 is Will stop. In this state, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the link member 3211 is in a vertically upright state, and the second lower front decoration 3212 is positioned above the first lower back decoration 3209. .

  In addition, when the back first front decoration 3209 and the second back front decoration 3212 are lifted, as shown in FIG. 148, the first back decoration 2209 and second back decoration 3212 are back. , And is located within the front view frame of the center character 2500 and can be sufficiently viewed from the player side (front). That is, the back bottom front first decorative body 3209 and the back bottom front second decoration body 3212 are in the state of the appearance position which can be visually recognized from the player side. The first back decoration 3209 and the second back decoration 3212 are positioned forward of the second back decoration 3152 of the second movable presentation unit 3100 in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 148. There is no contact with the back surface decoration 3152. Further, by moving the back lower front second decorative body 3212 to the appearance position, a part thereof is formed so as to overlap front and rear with respect to the back upper decorative body 3152 at the second appearance position.

  When the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are in the appearance position, the drive gear 3103 is reversed by the back lower front drive motor 3102 in the direction opposite to the above. When the back decoration front first decoration body 3209 descends, the back decoration front second decoration body 3212 rotates so as to move to the left in front view. Then, when the detection piece 3206b of the rack member 3206 is detected by the back lower front movable detection sensor 3208, the rotational drive of the back lower front drive motor 3102 is stopped, and the descent of the back lower first decoration 3209 is stopped. The rotation of the back second front decoration member 3212 is stopped, and the back bottom first decoration member 3209 and the back front second decoration member 3212 return to the retracted position.

  Thus, the back lower front movable effect unit 3200 includes the back lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 outside the frame (withdrawal position) and within the frame (appearing position) of the center character 2500. The player can be surprised by appearing in the frame of the center character 2500 because the player can be moved between them. In addition, the first back of the first decorative body 3209 ascends, the second back of the second decorative body 3212 is made to appear to rotate, and the first back of the first decorative body 3209 and the second back of the second back decoration. Since 3212 and 3212 appear to move differently from each other, it is possible to make the motion of the moveable effect appear as if it is moving in a complex manner, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9 g. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view of the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 120 (a) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating ornament facing the front, and (b) is a back right rotating ornament in (a) And (c) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit showing the second decorative surface of the back right rotating ornament body directed to the front. (D) is a front view of the back right movable effect unit shown with the third decorative surface of the back right rotating decorative body facing the front.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the right in front view of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3300 is mounted in the back box 3010 and extends in the vertical direction in a front view U-shaped back right plate metal base 3301 and a back upper right base attached to the front top of the back right plate metal base 3301 3302, the back lower right base 3303 attached to the lower front of the back right sheet metal base 3301, the back right drive motor 3304 mounted to the lower surface of the back lower right base 3303, and the rotation drive by the back right drive motor 3304 And a cylindrical back right rotation decoration 3310 rotatably mounted by the back upper right base 3302 and the back lower right base 3303.

  The back right sheet metal base 3301 is formed of a metal plate. The back upper right base 3302 has a cylindrical cover part 3302a with a low height covering the upper part of the back right rotation decorative body 3310, and a cutout part 3302b cut out a predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the cover part 3302a . The lower right lower base 3303 has a discharge port 3303a penetrating vertically. The notch 3302 b of the back upper right base 3302 is located immediately after the rear discharge port 2554 in the center character 2500 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled. Further, the outlet 3303 a of the lower right lower base 3303 is located immediately above the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

  The back right rotation decorative body 3310 has a first decorative surface 3310 a, a second decorative surface 3310 b, and a third decorative surface 3310 c which divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. The back right rotation decorative body 3310 is a pair of an opening 3311 extending vertically in the first decoration surface 3310a and a pair of the opening 3311 closed from the rotation center side and slidably mounted in the vertical direction. Shutter 3312, an inner decorative body 3313 mounted at the center of the opening 3311 in the vertical direction at the rotation center side with respect to the pair of shutters 3312, and a rotation center side than the inner decorative body 3313 facing outward The back right first decorative substrate (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted and the rotation center side of the back right first decorative substrate is mounted closer to or away from the pair of shutters 3312 And a back right shutter solenoid (not shown).

  In the first decorative surface 3310a of the back right rotation decorative body 3310, a pair of shutters 3312 are normally in close contact with each other (see FIG. 120 (a)). Then, when the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by driving the back right shutter solenoid according to the gaming state, the inner decorative body 3313 is exposed to the outside from between the pair of shutters 3312. In this state, the back right first decoration By making the LED of the substrate emit light, it is possible to show the player the inner decoration 3313 decorated to emit light.

  Further, on the second decorative surface 3310 b of the back right rotation decorative body 3310, although a detailed illustration is omitted, a back right character decoration 3318 having a predetermined character formed in a relief shape and having translucency is provided. Have. A back right second decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached to the surface facing the outside on the rotation center side than the second decoration surface 3310 b. The second decorative surface 3310 b (back right character decoration 3318) can be lighted and decorated by the decoration substrate.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the game ball is open to the third decorative surface 3310c of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 so that the game ball can enter at the same height as the cover portion 3302a of the back upper right base 3302. A game ball which is in communication with the back right ball inlet 3320 and the back right ball inlet 3320 and is in communication with the outlet 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and is disposed closer to the rotation center than the outer peripheral surface. The ball guide member 3322 mounted in the back right effect space 3321 and the back right effect space 3321 that allows the game to flow, and rolling the gaming ball entering the back right ball entrance 3220 downward, and the back And a back right third decoration substrate 3323 which extends vertically and adjacent to the right effect space 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the back right rotation decorative body 3310 in any direction about an axis extending in the vertical direction by rotational driving of the back right drive motor 3304. In the back right movable effect unit 3300, in the normal state (first decoration state), as shown in FIG. 120 (a), the first decoration surface 3310a faces the front. In the first decorative surface 3310 a, a pair of shutters 3312 disposed closer to the center of rotation than the opening 3311 normally abut each other to close the opening 3311.

  Further, in the first decorative state, the notch 3302 b of the cover portion 3302 a in the back upper right base 3302 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310 a. Therefore, when the back right movable effect unit 3300 is in the first decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center combination 2500 which coincides with the notch 3302 b is also closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310 a. Thus, when the gaming ball is received in the upper large winning opening 2006 of the center character 2500 in the first decoration state, the rear discharge opening 2554 of the rear guiding path 2553 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the first decoration surface 3310 a Therefore, the gaming ball received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guide passage 2553, passes through the escape passage 2555, and then the back right ball passage from the discharge opening 2556 It is delivered to the third entrance 3043 of the unit 3040 and discharged downward through the back right ball passage unit 3040.

  When the back right movable effect unit 3300 is energized in the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in the first decoration state, the pair of shutters 3312 separate in the vertical direction, and the inner decorative body 3313 is between the pair of shutters 3312 It will be in the state of facing outward (refer FIG. 120 (b)). Then, the LEDs (high-brightness LEDs) of the back right first decoration substrate (not shown) disposed closer to the rotation center than the inner decoration 3313 emit light, and the inner decoration 3313 facing between the pair of shutters 3312 is emitted Decorate. Thus, it is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be brought into a state in which the second decoration surface 3310 b of the back right rotation decoration 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304 (second decoration state). (See FIG. 120 (c)). In this second decoration state, by emitting the LED of the back right second decoration substrate (not shown), the back right character decoration 3318 consisting of a predetermined character formed on the second decoration surface 3310 b can be decorated to emit light The player can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance, etc. Further, in the second decorative state, as in the first decorative state, the notch 3302 b of the cover portion 3302 a is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310 b.

  Furthermore, the back right movable effect unit 3300 may be brought into a state in which the third decoration surface 3310 c of the back right rotation decoration 3310 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back right drive motor 3304 (third decoration state). (See FIG. 120 (d)). In the third decoration state, as shown in the figure, the back right effect space 3321 in which the game balls can be distributed can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in the third decoration state, the back right ball inlet 3320 is located at the site of the cutout portion 3302b of the cover portion 3302a. Therefore, in the third decoration state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the center character 2500 matches the back right ball inlet 3320, and the gaming balls are in fluid communication.

  Then, in the third decoration state, the gaming ball received in the upper large winning opening 2006 of the center character 2500 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guiding path 2553 and back right presentation space 3321 The ball guiding member 3322 disposed at the bottom of the back right rendering space 3321 spirally descends while rotating a plurality of times (here eight times) around an axis extending up and down (see FIG. 175A). . As a result, the gaming balls received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 can be made to flow spirally in the back right rendering space 3321. Therefore, the gaming balls received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 can be surely viewed by the player. As well as being able to increase the feeling of expectation for the payout of gaming balls by accepting the gaming balls to the large winning opening 2006, the player can be entertained by the gaming balls flowing down in a spiral, and it is interesting Can be suppressed. Also, by rotating the gaming ball received in the upper large winning opening 2006 while rotating in a spiral manner, it is possible to enter more balls than the number actually entered into the upper large winning opening 2006. There is also an effect that it is possible to make the player illusion.

  After that, the gaming ball which has flowed down in the back right rendering space 3321 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the back lower right base 3303 and enters the second entrance 3042 of the lower right ball guidance unit 3040 opened immediately below. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is discharged into the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9 h. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 121 to 123. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit shown with the first decorative surface of the back left rotating ornament facing the front, and FIG. 122 (b) is a second decoration of the back left rotating ornament. It is a front view of the back left movable effect unit which shows the state which turned the surface to the front, (c) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit which shows the third decoration surface of the back left rotation decoration body to the front (D) is a front view of the back left movable effect unit showing a state in which the back left projecting decorative body of the back left rotating decorative body is in the appearance position in the state of (a). Further, FIG. 123 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F in FIG. 122 (a).

  The back left movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a in a front view in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3400 is a back left plate metal base 3401 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending vertically in a front view U shape, and a back upper left base attached to the front upper portion of the back left plate metal base 3401 It is rotationally driven by a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the back lower left base 3403 attached to the front lower portion of the back left sheet metal base 3401, a back left drive motor 3404 attached to the bottom surface of the back left bottom metal base 3403, A cylindrical back left rotary ornament 3410 rotatably mounted by the back upper left base 3402 and the back lower left base 3403 is provided. The back left sheet metal base 3401 is formed of a metal plate.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a first decorative surface 3410 a, a second decorative surface 3410 b, and a third decorative surface 3410 c which divide the outer peripheral surface into three in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back left rotating decorative body 3410 has a door decoration 3411 with a door overlooked on the first decorative surface 3410a. The back left rotation decoration 3410 is disposed closer to the rotation center than the first decoration surface, and has a back left first decoration substrate 3412 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface facing outward. . By appropriately emitting the LED of the back left first decoration substrate 3412, the first decoration surface 3410a can be decorated to emit light.

  Further, on the second decorative surface 3410 b of the back left rotating decorative body 3410, characters that are different from the back right character decoration 3318 of the back right rotating decorative body 3310 are formed in a relief shape although detailed illustration is omitted. A translucent left character decoration 3413 is provided. A back left second decoration substrate 3414 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached to the surface facing the outside on the rotation center side of the second decoration surface 3410 b, and the back left second decoration substrate 3414 The second decorative surface 3410 b (back left character decoration 3413) can be lighted and decorated.

  Furthermore, on the third decorative surface 3410 c of the back left rotary decorative body 3410, the back left projection portion 3415 forming the outer peripheral surface and the rotation center side of the back left projection portion 3415 are arranged to be translucent And a back left third decorative substrate 3417 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted on a surface which is disposed on the rotation center side of the projection film 3416 and faces outward. Although not shown, the projection film 3416 has a red pattern projected in red and a blue pattern projected in blue, which are represented by a single color and are different from each other. The portion where the design and the blue design overlap is made milky white or transparent, and the portion other than the red design and the blue design is black or opaque. In the third decorative portion 3410c, in the back left third decorative substrate 3417, the red pattern can be projected onto the back left projection portion 3415 by emitting red light, and the blue pattern can be reflected back by emitting blue light It can be projected on the left projection unit 3415.

  Further, on the third decorative surface 3410 c, a pair of door members 3420 which are disposed up and down at the end near the first decorative surface 3410 a in the back left projection portion 3415 and which can be opened and closed, and each door member 3420 A pair of back left protrusions slidably disposed between the retracted position located inside the outer peripheral surface of the back left rotary decorative body 3410 and the appearing position protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface, which are arranged on the rotation center side A decoration 3421 and a pair of back left decoration solenoids 3422 mounted in the back left rotation decoration 3410 and slidingly driving each back left protruding decoration 3421 are provided.

  As illustrated, the door member 3420 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. Although not shown, both ends of the vertically extending side of the door member 3420 far from the first decorative surface 3410 a are rotatably attached, and the opposite vertically extending side is the third side. It is opened and closed so as to move outward beyond the decorative surface 3410 c. In addition, the door member 3420 has a hook-shaped closing claw 3420a which protrudes from an inner side surface in the vicinity of the vertically extending side which is rotatably attached.

  The back left projecting decorative body 3421 is attached such that the sliding direction is in the left-right direction when the first decorative surface 3410 a is directed forward (front). This back left projecting decorative body 3421 is formed in a shape surpassing a shuriken, as shown in FIG. 122 (d) and the like. The back left projecting decorative body 3421 protrudes in the direction away from the first decorative surface 3410 a from the vicinity of the tip, and has a closing piece 3421 a that can engage with the closing claw 3420 a of the door member 3420.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back left rotary ornament 3410 in the back left movable effect unit 3400 will be described. The back left movable effect unit 3400 can rotate the back left rotary ornament 3410 in any direction about an axis extending in the vertical direction by rotational driving of the back left drive motor 3404. In the normal state (first decoration state), the back left movable effect unit 3400 stops with the first decoration surface 3410a facing forward as shown in FIG. 122 (a). In this first decoration state, the first decoration surface 3410 a can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left first decoration substrate 3412. Since the first decoration surface 3410a is provided with a door decoration 3411 imitating a door, by making the first decoration surface 3410a emit light and make it appear to the player that the door decoration 3411 may be opened. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, in the normal state, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 of the back left rotary decorative body 3410 is housed inside the back left rotary decorative body 3410 by the biasing force of a spring not shown. It is located at the retracted position. In the state of this retracted position, the outer surface of the door member 3420 is in a closed state in which the outer surface of the door member 3420 is flush with the third decorative surface 3410 c, and the closing piece 3421a of the back left projecting decorative body 3421 It is locked to 3420a. Thus, even if centrifugal force is applied to the back left projecting decorative body 3421 and the door member 3420 by rotating the back left rotating decorative body 3410, the back left projecting decorative body 3421 appears by the biasing force of a spring (not shown). Can be blocked, and the closing piece 3421a can be locked to the locking claw 3420a to prevent the door member 3420 from opening.

  When the back left decoration solenoid 3422 is driven (energized) in the first decoration state, the back left protruding decoration 3421 slides outward against the biasing force of a spring (not shown) and the back left protrudes. The door member 3420 is opened by being pushed by the tip of the decorative body 3421, and the back left projecting decorative body 3421 is in the state of the appearance position where it protrudes outward beyond the third decorative surface 3410c. As a result, the player can be surprised by the fact that the back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes from the cylindrically rotating back left rotating decorative body 3410. In addition, since the pair of back left projecting decorative bodies 3421 can be independently projected, it is possible to present a variety of movable effects to the player.

  When the back left decorative body 3421 stops driving the back left decorative body 3422 in the state of the appearance position, the back left protruding decorative body 3421 slides to the retracted position by a spring (not shown). At this time, the closing piece 3421a is locked by the locking claw 3420a, so that the door member 3420 can be rotated from the open state to the closed state, and automatically returns to the normal state.

  In addition, the back left movable effect unit 3400 can be brought into a state in which the second decoration surface 3410 b of the back left rotary decoration 3410 is stopped forward by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404 (second decoration state) (See FIG. 122 (b)). At the time of this second decoration state, it is possible to make the back left character decoration 3413 emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting the LED of the back left second decoration substrate 3414, and suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player Can.

  Furthermore, the back left movable effect unit 3400 can be brought into a state in which the third decoration surface 3410 c of the back left rotation decoration 3410 is stopped forward by the rotation drive of the back left drive motor 3404 (third decoration state). Yes (see FIG. 122 (c)). In this third decoration state, when the red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decoration substrate 3417, the red design can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and when the blue light is emitted, the blue design is displayed. It can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained or the expectation can be heightened.

  Thus, according to the back right movable effect unit 3300, various movable effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be entertained.

[5-9i. Back and back movable production unit]
Next, the back and bottom rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 124 to 136. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the back of the back unit as viewed from the front of the back movable back effect unit, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the back of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting unit of the back and back movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting and lowering unit of the back and back movable effect unit as viewed from the back FIG. FIG. 127 is an explanatory view showing from the front the state of the lifting and lowering unit when the back and back rotating decorative unit is at the lowering end position, and FIG. 128 is a view of the lifting and lowering unit when the back and back rotating and rotating decoration unit is at It is an explanatory view showing a state from the front.

  Further, FIG. 129 (a) is a front view of the back and back movable presentation unit, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view of the back and back back and back rotation decorative unit of the movable presentation unit as viewed from the front. 2.) is a perspective view of the back and back rear rotating decorative unit of the movable effect unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back and back rotating decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back and back rotating and decorative unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 132 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. 129 (a).

  Further, FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing a state where the back decoration of the back decoration of the back rotation decoration unit is stopped rotating, and (b) is a back view rotation decoration body of the back view back view. (C) is a front view showing a state immediately before rotating in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, with the back-to-back back-to-back rotating decorative body being opened. 2.) is a front view showing a state in which the back and back back rotating decorative body is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front. FIG. 134 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a drive mechanism related to the back and back rotation drive motor in the back and back rotation decoration unit, and FIG. 134 (b) is a rotation damper in the back and back rotation and rotation decoration body unit. It is an explanatory view showing the composition of the differential mechanism concerned, and (c) is the connection which has connected the drive mechanism concerning the back and back back rotation drive motor and the differential mechanism concerning the rotation damper in the back and back rotation decoration body unit. It is an explanatory view showing composition of a mechanism.

  FIG. 135 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and rotation is stopped, and FIG. 135 (b) is a counterclockwise rotation decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when rotating to a direction. FIG. 136 (a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the connection mechanism when the back decoration is closed and the rotation is stopped, and FIG. 136 (b) is a clockwise direction of the connection ring of the drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of a connection mechanism when rotating and back bottom back rotation decoration body is opening, (c) is further connected to the back link back rotation back rotation rotation of the connection ring of a drive mechanism clockwise. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism when a body fully opens, and (d) is back rotation in the open state, when the rotation decoration is rotating clockwise with the connection mechanism of a drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the connection mechanism of.

  The back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is attached below the opening 3010 a near the rear end in the back box 3010. The back and back movable effect unit 3500 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has an elevation unit 3510 to which the back and front movable effect unit 3200 is attached at the front, and a back and bottom rotating decorative body vertically moved up and down by the elevation unit 3510 And a unit 3550.

  The lift unit 3510 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the unit base 3511 attached to the front of the rear wall below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010, and to the rear surface of the unit base 3511 in the lower left corner. Back and forth raising and lowering drive motor 3512 whose rotation axis protrudes forward through the unit base 3511 and a spur gear shaped raising and lowering driving gear 3513 attached to the rotation axis of the back and forth raising and lowering drive motor 3512 A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3514a meshing with the elevation drive gear 3513; and a second transmission gear 3514b that rotates integrally with the front surface of the first transmission gear 3514a and has a diameter smaller than that of the first transmission gear 3514a. A transmission gear member 3514 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3511; And A member second transmission gear 3514b engaged to and unit base 3511 lifting drive pinion gear 3515 rotatably mounted in and spur gear shape of 3514, and a.

  In addition, the lifting unit 3510 has a guide slit 3516a extending vertically at the approximate center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a flat detection piece 3516b projecting leftward from the lower left end in front view The elevator base 3516 is mounted on the front of the unit base 3510 so as to be slidable up and down, and on the rear surface of the unit base 3510 is slidably attached to the rear decoration unit 3550 so as to slide up and down. Lift drive rack gear 3517 attached to the rear surface near the left end of the front view and extending vertically and meshing with the lift drive pinion gear 3515, and extending vertically, the upper end is the same height as the upper end of the unit base 3511 Fixed rack gear 3 attached to the front of the unit base 3511 18 and a vertically extending movable side rack gear 3551b which is in mesh with the fixed side rack gear 3518 and attached to the back surface of the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550, and is rotatably mounted on the elevating base 3516 And an accelerating gear 3519 in the form of a spur gear.

  Further, the lifting unit 3510 is attached to the front of the unit base 3511 so as to cover the front of the lifting drive gear 3513, the transmission gear member 3514, the lifting drive pinion gear 3515, and the fixed rack gear 3518 on the left of the lift base 3516 in a front view. Unit mounted on the front of the gear cover left 3520 and the gear cover left 3520 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3516b of the elevation base 3516, and a unit in the front view right side of the elevation base 3516 A spur gear-shaped guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably mounted on the front of the base 3511 and a guide pinion gear 3522 are engaged with the guide pinion gear 3522 and vertically extended and mounted on the rear end surface of the elevation base 3516 in front view The guiding rack gear 3523 and the guiding rack gear 3523 Gear cover right 3524 attached to the front of unit base 3511 and the lower end side is attached to lift base 3516 and the upper end side is attached to gear cover left 3520 and gear cover right 3524 respectively. And a pair of assist springs 3525 urging the members upward.

  The lifting unit 3510 is mounted on the substrate base 3526 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3511 on the right side in the front view, and on the rear surface of the substrate base 3526. A back bottom relay board relaying connection between a detection sensor 3521, back back rotation drive motor 3553, back back rotation detection sensor 3570, and back back decoration substrate 3572 and motor drive board 3062 and lamp drive board 3060 And 3527.

  Subsequently, the operation of the lifting and lowering unit 3510 in the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back lower back movable effect unit 3500 is located at the lower end position where the back lower back rotary decorative body 3550 is most lowered. In the state of the lowered end position, as shown in FIG. 127, at the upper end of the elevation drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevation base 3516, the elevation drive pinion gear 3515 attached to the unit base 3511 and the guide The pinion gears 3522 are in mesh with each other. In addition, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 is engaged with the lower end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and is movable attached to the back rear rotation decoration unit 3550. It meshes with the upper end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  Further, in the state of the lowering end position, the guide pin 3552b of the back and back rear decorative unit 3550 inserted in the guide slit 3516a of the elevating base 3516 via the guide bush 3528 is positioned at the lower end of the guide slit 3516a. ing. Furthermore, in the state of the lowering end position, the detection piece 3516b of the elevating base 3516 is detected by the back bottom back raising / lowering detection sensor 3521 and the pair of assist springs 3525 extend and bias the elevating base 3516 upward. doing.

  As shown in FIG. 83, etc., when the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 is at the falling end position, the back bottom back rotation rotation body 3568 is more than the lower end of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. A part is visible from the player side above the stage 2530 in the frame of the center character 2500 below.

  When the up-down drive gear 3513 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view by the up-down back-up drive motor 3512 when the back-down back rotation decoration unit 3550 is at the lowering end position, the up-down drive pinion gear 3515 is The lift base 3516 is lifted by the lift drive rack gear 3517 which rotates in the direction and meshes with the lift drive pinion gear 3515. When the elevating base 3516 ascends, the acceleration gear 3519 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3516 also ascends together with the elevating base 3516. The acceleration gear 3519 is in mesh with the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511. Therefore, when the elevating base 3516 (acceleration gear 3519) is raised with respect to the unit base 3511, the acceleration gear 3519 is in front view. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

  As the acceleration gear 3519 is engaged with the movable side rack gear 3551b attached to the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 on the opposite side to the fixed side rack gear 3518, the acceleration gear 3519 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. When it is rotated, the back and back rear decorative unit 3550 is raised relative to the elevating base 3516 via the movable side rack gear 3551 b. At this time, the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550 is lifted at a speed twice as high as the speed of the elevation base 3516 by the acceleration gear 3519 engaged with the fixed side rack gear 3518 of the unit base 3511.

  Further, in the lift unit 3510, the guide rack gear 3523 opposite to the lift drive rack gear 3517 in the lift base 3516 meshes with the guide pinion gear 3522 rotatably mounted on the unit base 3511, so The lifting base 3516 can be lifted straight without the right end side of the base 3516 being crushed. Further, in the lift unit 3510, since the lift base 3516 is biased upward by the pair of assist springs 3525, the load on the back and rear lift drive motor 3512 is reduced. In the pair of assist springs 3525, the assist spring 3525 on the right side in a front view far from the elevation drive rack gear 3517 is extended longer than the assist spring 3525 on the left side and the urging force is strengthened. doing.

  Then, when the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 is located at the highest rising end position, the back bottom back raising / lowering drive motor 3512 is stopped. In the state of the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide pin 3552b of the back bottom back rotation ornament unit 3550 is located at the upper end of the guide slit 3516a of the elevation base 3516. Further, at the lower end position, at the lower ends of the elevation drive rack gear 3517 and the guide rack gear 3523 attached to the elevation base 3516, the elevation drive pinion gear 3515 and the guide pinion gear 3522 attached to the unit base 3511 respectively. I am engaged. In addition, the acceleration gear 3519 attached to the elevating base 3516 is engaged with the upper end of the fixed rack gear 3518 attached to the unit base 3511, and is movable attached to the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550. It meshes with the lower end of the side rack gear 3551b.

  When the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 is at the rising end position, as shown in FIG. 152, the back bottom back rotation rotation body 3568 is within the frame of the center character 2500 in front view (the front surface of the central liquid crystal display 1500). It is located in the approximate center of). When the elevating drive gear 3513 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view by the back elevating drive motor 3512 in a state where the back decoration unit 3550 is at the rising end position, the operation reverse to the above is performed. The back and bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 is lowered and returned to the lowered end position.

  Subsequently, the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 will be described. The back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550 has a cylindrical shaft portion 3551a extending forward from the top, and a movable side rack gear 3551b extending up and down on the rear surface of the bottom and meshing with the acceleration gear 3159 A shallow container-like decorative body base 3551 which extends vertically and is open at the front, and which has a diameter larger than that of the axial cylindrical portion 3551 a of the decorative body base 3551 at the upper portion , And a guide pin 3552b projecting in a cylindrical shape forward from the lower part and inserted into the guide slit 3516a of the lifting unit 3510, and the rear is open. And a base cover 3552 attached to the front of the decoration base 3551 in a shallow box shape.

  In addition, the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550 has a back bottom back rotation drive motor 3553 attached to the lower back surface of the base cover 3552 and a spur gear shape mounted to the rotation shaft of the back bottom back rotation drive motor 3553 And a spur gear-like first driven gear 3555 meshed with the rotation driving gear 3554 and rotatably mounted between the decoration base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and a first driven gear A spur gear second driven gear 3556 meshing with the 3555 and rotatably mounted between the decoration base 3551 and the base cover 3552 and a second driven gear 3556 meshing with the decoration base 3551 Gear-like third driven gear 3557 and third driven gear 3557 rotatably mounted between the gear and the base cover 3552 A spur gear shaped fourth driven gear 3558 rotatably mounted between the decorative body base 3551 and the base cover 3552 and an annular drive ring gear 3559a meshing with the fourth driven gear 3558 The plurality of (here, three) engaging convex portions 3559b protruding forward and spaced apart from the front end of the drive ring gear 3559a and flanged outward from the rear end of the drive ring gear 3559a Drive gear member 3559 having a drive detection piece 3559c partially cut away in the circumferential direction, four mounting holes 3560a formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and forward from the rear end The drive gear member 3559 includes a plurality of engagement recesses 3560 b which are recessed and in which the plurality of engagement projections 3559 b of the drive gear member 3559 are inserted and engaged. It has substantially the same size as the outer diameter and coupling ring of the ring-shaped formed on the inner diameter 3560, the.

  The outer diameter and the inner diameter of the drive ring gear 3559 and the connection ring 3560 are smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 3552 a of the base cover 3552 and larger than the outer diameter of the barrel portion 3551 a of the decorative body base 3551. Further, the drive ring gear 3559 and the connection ring 3560 have the same inner shape. In the back bottom back rotation decoration unit 3550, the back bottom back rotation drive motor 3553, the rotation drive gear 3554, the first driven gear 3555, the second driven gear 3556, the third driven gear 3557, the fourth driven gear 3558, the drive gear member The 3559 and the connection ring 3560 form a drive mechanism 3550A which is directly driven to rotate by the back and rear rotation drive motor 3553 (see FIG. 134A and the like).

  Furthermore, the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550 passes through the through hole 3552a of the base cover 3552, the connection ring 3560, and the drive ring member 3559 from the front, and the axial tube portion 3551a of the decoration base 3551 is inserted. A cylindrical outer cylinder portion 3561a, a plurality of connection recesses 3561b recessed toward the front from the rear end of the outer cylinder portion 3561a and spaced in the circumferential direction, an outer cylinder portion 3561a in front of the base cover 3552 A flat base portion 3561c extending outward from the front end of the frame, and four guide slits 3561d penetrating the base portion 3561c back and forth and radially extending about the axial center of the outer cylindrical portion The rotating decoration base 3561 is inserted into the outer cylindrical portion 3561 a of the rotating decoration base 3561 and the decoration base A cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 3562a through which the shaft cylindrical portion 3551a of the sleeve 3551 is inserted, a ring-shaped differential ring gear 3562b formed on the rear end outer periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 3562a behind the drive gear member 3559, a differential A plurality of connection convex portions 3562c protruding from the front surface of the ring gear 3562b at intervals in the circumferential direction and inserted into and connected to the connection concave portions 3561b of the rotary decorative body base 3561, outward from the rear end of the differential ring gear 3562b A differential gear member 3562 having a flange shape and a differential detection piece 3562d in which a part in the circumferential direction is cut out is meshed with a differential ring gear 3562b of the differential gear member 3562 A spur gear-like differential transmission gear rotatably mounted coaxially with the fourth driven gear 3558 between the decoration base 3551 and the base cover 3552 The damper gear 3564 is rotatably attached in a state of applying rotational resistance to the damper gear 3564 meshing with the spur gear 5364 engaged with the differential transmission gear 3563, and is attached to the rear surface of the decoration base 3551. And a rotating damper member 3565.

  The outer diameter of the outer cylinder portion 3561a in the rotary decorative body base 3561 is slightly smaller than the inner diameters of the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560, and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 3561a allows the drive gear member 3559 and the connection ring 3560 to rotate. It is attached. Further, the inner diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 3561 a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 3562 a of the differential gear member 3562. The base portion 3561 c is formed larger than the through hole 3552 a of the base cover 3552. The guide slits 3561 d are formed at an interval of 90 degrees with respect to the circumferential direction of the outer cylinder portion 3561 a.

  The inner cylindrical portion 3562a of the differential gear member 3562 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 3551a of the decorative body base 3551, and is rotatably mounted by the cylindrical portion 3551a. The rotary damper member 3565 applies a rotational resistance to the rotation shaft on which the damper gear 3564 is mounted, by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid enclosed inside, although detailed illustration is omitted. In the lower back rear decoration unit 3550, the rotation decoration member base 3561, the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, the damper gear 3564, and the rotation damper member 3565 directly impart rotational resistance by the rotation damper member 3565. The differential mechanism 3550B is configured (see FIG. 134 (b) and the like).

  In addition, the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550 has a cylindrical slide pin 3566a that protrudes backward through the guide slit 3561d, and each guide is formed on the front surface of the base portion 3561c in the rotation decoration base 3561. With four decoration sliders 3566 slidably attached by slits 3561d and a tip hole 3567a which penetrates back and forth and into which slide pins 3566a of the decoration slider 3566 are rotatably inserted And has a proximal end pin 3567b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape rearwardly and is rotatably inserted into the attachment hole 3560a of the connection ring 3560, and has four strip-like connection arms 3567; Four backs attached to the front of each decor body slider 3566 and decorated on the front A rotary decoration member 3568, and a, and four rotation restricting member 3569 which regulates the range of rotation of the connecting arm 3567 is attached to the rear surface of the backing under the rotated decorative body 3568.

  The back-to-back and back-to-back rotary decorative body 3568 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and one of the four apexes is formed at a right angle, and diagonally opposite apexes passing through the perpendicular apexes. Is formed at an acute angle. The underside rotating ornament 3568 directs the apex of the right angle toward the central axis of rotation of the rotating ornament base 3561 and the diagonal through the apex of the right angle is the sliding direction of the ornament slider 3566 (guide of the rotating ornament base 3561 It is attached to the decoration body slider 3566 so that it may extend in the direction in which the slit 3561 d extends. The four back and back rotating ornaments 3568 can slide toward and away from each other by the guide slits 3561 d of the rotary ornament base 3561.

  In the back and back rotation decoration unit 3550, the decoration slider 3566, the connection arm 3567, the back and back rotation decoration 3568, and the rotation restricting member 3569 connect the drive mechanism 3550A and the differential mechanism 3550B to rotate. A connecting mechanism 3550C that transmits is configured (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  Furthermore, the back bottom rear rotation decoration unit 3550 is attached between the decoration base 3551 and the base cover 3552, and the drive detection piece 3559c of the drive gear member 3559 and the differential detection piece 3562d of the differential ring gear 3562. Back-to-back rotation detection sensor 3570 for detecting the rotational position of the base, and a fixed decorative body base 3571 which penetrates the center of the rotary decorative body base 3651 from the front and whose rear end is attached to the barrel 3551 a of the decorative body base And a back-rear decoration board 3572 attached to the front of the fixed decoration base 3571 at the front of the rotation decoration base 3561 and behind the back decoration of the rotation decoration 3568 and on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted. Fixed between back-to-back decoration substrate 3572 and back-to-back rotation decoration 3568 is attached to the front of decoration base 3571 Cage front decorated is provided with a disk-shaped subplantar after fixing the decorative body 3573 having a light-transmitting property with are subjected.

  Next, the operation of the back and back rotation decorative body 3568 of the back and back rotation decorative unit 3550 in the back and back movable presentation unit 3500 will be described. In the back-to-back and back-to-back decorative unit 3550, in the normal state, the four back-to-back and back-to-back decorative members 35 slide toward the center of rotation of the rotating and decorative base 3561 and abut on each other. In a normal state, the drive gear member 3559 is stopped with the cut-out portion of the drive detection piece 3559c facing leftward in a front view (see FIG. 134A). Further, the differential gear member 3562 is stopped with the cut-out portion of the differential detection piece 3562d directed rightward in a front view (see FIG. 134 (b)). In addition, an axis line connecting the center of the proximal end pin 3567b rotatably attached to the attachment hole 3560a of the coupling ring 3560 and the center of the distal end hole 3567a of the four connecting arms 3567 is the connecting ring 3560 The slide pin 3566a of the decoration slider 3566, which extends so as to be in contact with a circle centered on the rotation center and is rotatably mounted to the tip hole 3567a, is on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d in the rotation decoration base 3 It is located at the end. Further, in the normal state, in the four connection arms 3567, the tip end holes 3567a are separated from the proximal end pins 3567b in the clockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 134 (c) and the like).

  In this normal state (see FIG. 135 (a) etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated clockwise in a front view by the rear lower back rotational drive motor 3553, the connection ring 3560 together with the drive gear member 3559. Is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. When the connection ring 3560 is to be rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the connection arm 3567 and the end hole 3567a of the connection arm 3567 of the connection arm 3567 are the decorative body slider via the proximal end pin 3567b attached to the mounting hole 3560a The slide pin 3566a attached to the tip end hole 3560a is in the guide slit 3561d, since the guide pin 3566d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached via the slide pin 3566a of 3566 tries to move away from the guide slit 3561d. Try to slide towards the rotation center side.

  However, in this normal state, the slide pin 3566a is located at the end on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d, and can not slide further toward the rotation center. As a result, the connecting arm 3567 pulls the rotary decorative body base 3561 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view through the guide slit 3561 d. Since the rotation resistance of the rotation damper member 3565 acts on the rotation decoration base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotation resistance of the rotation damper member 3565 is resisted. Then, the rotating decoration base 3561 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the rotary decoration base 3561 is rotated in the front counterclockwise direction, the slide pin 3566a of the decoration slider 3566 is located at the end on the rotation center side of the guide slit 3561d. The back-bottom and rear-turn decorative members 3568 attached to the 3566 are rotated toward the center of rotation and in contact with each other (see FIG. 135 (b)). In addition, during rotation of the four back and back rotating decorative bodies 3568 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the center of rotation is made by the connecting arm 3567 on the decoration slider 3566 to which the back and back rotating decorative bodies 3568 are attached. Because of the force acting to slide in, there is no possibility that the rotary decorative body 3568 slides outward by centrifugal force.

  On the other hand, in the normal state (see FIG. 136 (a) etc.), when the rotary drive gear 3554 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view by the back and rear rotary drive motor 3553, the drive gear member 3559 is connected together. The ring 3560 will rotate in the clockwise direction. When the connecting ring 3560 is to be rotated clockwise, the connecting arm 3567 is mounted on the mounting hole 3560a, and the distal end hole 3567a of the connecting arm 3567 is a slide of the decoration slider 3566. The slide pin 3566a attached to the tip end hole 3560a is moved through the guide slit 3561d because it tries to move in the direction to approach the guide slit 3561d of the rotary decoration base 3561 attached through the pin 3566a. It is attempted to rotate the rotating decoration base 3561 clockwise.

  However, since the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565 acts on the rotary decorative body base 3561 via the differential gear member 3562, the differential transmission gear 3563, and the damper gear 3564, the rotary decorative body base 3561 rotates clockwise. The slide pin 3566a is moved along the guide slit 3561d from the center of rotation toward the outside before rotating in the direction of (see FIG. 136 (b)). As a result, when the slide pins 3566a (the decoration slider 3566) slide outward, the back and back rotating decoration 3568 slides so as to separate from each other.

  Then, when the connecting ring 3560 is further rotated clockwise in a front view and the mounting hole 3560a reaches the axis of the guide slit 3561d in the rotary decorative body base 3561, the connecting arm 3567 extends along the guide slit 3561d. At the same time, the side surface of the connection arm 3567 abuts on the rotation restricting member 3569, and the further rotation of the connection arm 3567 is prevented. In this state, the decorative body slider 3566 slides to the outermost side through the connecting arm 3567, and the back and rear back rotating decorative bodies 3568 are most separated and opened (see FIG. 136 (c). ). Also, in the state where the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 is opened, the back bottom back fixed decoration 3573 disposed behind the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 is visually recognized from between the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 (See FIGS. 133 (c) and (d) etc.).

  When the connection ring 3560 is further rotated clockwise in a front view in a state where the back and back rotation decoration 3568 is opened, the rotation of the connection arm 3567 is restricted by the rotation restriction member 3569, so that the rotation decoration is The base 3561 is rotated in the clockwise direction against the rotational resistance of the rotary damper member 3565, and is rotated in the clockwise direction with the rotary decorative body 3568 opened (see FIG. 136 (FIG. 136 (FIG. see d)). By turning the back decoration 3568 open, it becomes large and becomes noticeable, which can surprise the player.

  In the case of closing the back bottom back rotation decorative body 3568 in the open state, the connection ring 3567 is rotated in the reverse direction counterclockwise from the above, by the back bottom back rotation drive motor 3553, The back and back rotation decorative body 3568 slides toward the rotation center side and is in a closed state.

  In this manner, the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 moves the back bottom back rotary decoration unit 3550 to the rising end position, so that the back bottom back rotary decoration body 3568 is within the frame of the center character 2500 (game area 5a Can be moved to the center, and the back and back turning decorative body 3568 can be highlighted. In this state, the player can be surprised by rotating in the center of the game area 5a by rotating the back decoration device 3568 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. In addition, when the back-to-back rear turn decorative body 3568 is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the back-to-back rear turn decorative body 3568 rotates in the state of being opened and enlarged, which can further surprise the player. A variety of movable effects can be presented to the player.

[5-9 j. Back four corners movable production unit]
Next, the back four corners movable presentation unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 145. FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the back four corners of the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the back four corners of the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable effect unit, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back four corner second unit in the back four corner movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen.

  Further, FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the back four corner first unit in the back four corner movable presentation unit in the state of the normal retraction position, and FIG. 143 (b) is in the state of the appearance position It is a front view of a back four corner 1st unit, (c) is a front view of a back four corner 1st unit in the state of a back four corner second decoration body appearance position. Further, FIG. 144 (a) is an explanatory drawing showing from the left side the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner first decorative body is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism on the way from the retracted position to the appearance position of the back four corner first decoration from the left side, and (c) is the appearance position of the back four corner first decoration in the back four corner first unit It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of from the left side. FIG. 145 (a) is an explanatory drawing showing from the left side the state of the drive mechanism when the back four corner second decoration is in the retracted position in the back four corner first unit, and FIG. 145 (b) is at the back four corner first unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism on the way from the retracted position to the appearance position of the back four corner second decoration from the left side, and (c) is the appearance position of the back four corner second decoration in the back four corner first unit It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the drive mechanism at the time of from the left side.

  The four back corner movable effect units 3600 are attached to the four corners outside the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 is a back four corner first unit 3610 attached to the upper right corner and the lower left corner at the four corners in the back box 3010, and a back four corner second unit attached to the upper left corner and the lower right corner at the four corners in the back box 3010 And 3650. With respect to the back four corner first units 3610A attached to the upper right corner, the back four corner first units 3610B attached to the lower left corner are attached in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around the longitudinally extending axis. In addition, with respect to the back four corner second units 3650A attached to the upper left corner, the back four corner second units 3650B attached to the lower right corner are attached in a state of being rotated 180 degrees around an axis extending forward and backward.

  The following describes the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) attached to the upper right corner and the back four corner second unit 3650 (3650 A) attached to the upper left corner, and the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610 B) attached to the lower left corner And the back four corner second units 3650 (3650B) attached to the lower right corner are only 180 degrees rotated with respect to those attached to the upper right corner and the upper left corner, so the description will be omitted.

  First, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140 etc., the back four corner first unit 3610 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-like unit base 3611 which is open rearward and downward, and a front face of the unit base 3611 Mounted on the left side surface of the motor base 3612 and a shallow box-like motor base 3612 attached at the approximate center in the left-right direction and open on the left side (one facing the center of the back box 3010). It is attached to the left surface of the motor base 3612 at the back of the motor base cover front 3613 which covers the front side of the open left side of the motor base 3612 and the front side of the motor base cover front 3613. Right side face of motor base 3612 after the box-like motor base cover 3614 and the right and front are open The back four corner drive motor 3615 attached to the front and having its rotation axis protruding into the motor base 3612 and the rotation axis of the back four corner drive motor 3615 are covered by the front of the motor base cover 3613 And a transmission member 3616 housed in the motor base 3612.

  The transmission member 3616 has a cylindrical attachment shaft 3616a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3615, a disk-like base 3616b extending perpendicularly to the axis from the tip of the attachment shaft 3616a, and a base A detection piece 3616c projecting in a plate shape rightward from a surface facing the right in the portion 3616b, a first transmission portion 3617 provided on the surface facing the left of the base portion 3616b, and a base portion And a second transmitting portion 3618 provided on a surface facing the right of 3616b.

  The first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616 is a cylindrical first transmission pin 3617a projecting leftward in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b from around the periphery of the base portion 3616b, and a revolution of the first transmission pin 3617a A cylindrical first lock projection 3617b concentrically projecting leftwardly concentrically from the left surface of the base portion 3616b at a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock projection 3617b and the first transmission pin 3617a, A notch is formed in a fan shape from the equal range on both sides of the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the first transmission pin 3617a on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock projection 3617b. No. 317c, which is the first part.

  The second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616 is a cylindrical second transmission pin 3618a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the periphery of the base portion 3616b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3616b, and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3618a. A cylindrical second lock projection 3618b concentrically protruding rightwardly from the right surface of the base portion 3616b at a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3618b and the second transmission pin 3618a, From the equal range on both sides bordering on the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3616b and the center of the second transmission pin 3618a in the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projection 3618b, a fan-like notch is made toward the center of the second lock projection 3618b And a second notch 3618c.

  In the transmission member 3616, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3617a and the second transmission pin 3618a is the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3618 a protrudes from a position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3616 b with respect to the first transmission pin 3617 a. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b are the same. Further, in the transmission member 3616, the first notch 3617c of the first transmission portion 3617 and the second notch 3618c of the second transmission portion 3618 are formed on the circumference of the first lock projection 3617b and the second lock projection 3618b. In contrast, it is fan-shaped at an angle range of 72 degrees.

  In addition, a columnar receiving shaft member 3619 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover back 3614 at both ends behind the transmitting member 3616, and the receiving shaft The member 3619 has a working arm 3620a which is rotatably mounted by being penetrated and the rotation from the first transmission portion 3617 in the transmission member 3616 is transmitted and rotated to extend at right angles to the rotation axis. A first driven member 3620 and a link shaft member 3621 having both ends attached to the motor base 3612 and the motor base cover 3614 below the first driven member 3620 directly below the driven shaft member 3619 The link shaft member 3621 is rotatably attached by penetrating the proximal end side A link arm 3622 extending in the same direction as the action arm 3620a of the first output member 3620 in a direction perpendicular to the second end, and an upper end thereof is rotatably attached to the tip of the action arm 3620a The tip of the link arm 3622 is rotatably mounted so that the link arm 3622 extends parallel to the working arm 3620a below the upper end and the lower end of the link member 3623 and the lower end of the link member 3623 The back four corners first decoration 3624 attached to the front and surfacing with a shuriken, and the back four corners first decoration substrate 3625 attached to the back of the back four corners first decoration 3624 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front And have.

  The first receiving member 3620 has a shaft portion 3620b in which the action arm 3620a extends from the left end and the receiving shaft member 3619 passes through, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis from the right end of the shaft portion 3620b A first transmission main body 3620c having a disk shape, and a first transmission slit 3620d which is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the first transmission main body 3620c and into which the first transmission pin 3617a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3620d in the outer peripheral surface of the first power receiving main body portion 3620c, there are a pair of first lock recesses 3620e which are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3620 d is open to the outer peripheral surface of the first power receiving main body 3620 c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3620 a extends. The first lock recess 3620 e is recessed in a circular arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock projection 3617 b of the first transmission portion 3617. Further, the pair of first lock recesses 3620 e are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the first power receiving member 3620 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In the state in which the first units 3610 for back four corners (the four back movable corner effect unit 3600) are assembled, the first members to be transmitted 3620 are the first transmission pins 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as the first lock projection 3617 b. Thus, the first transmission pin 3617a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3617a and the first transmission slit 3620d. Further, a part of the first lock projection 3617b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3620e, and a part of the first lock projection 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3620 can be restricted (locked).

  The tip of the action arm 3620a of the first power receiving member 3620 and the tip of the link arm 3622 are rotatably attached to the link member 3623 by link pins 3626, respectively. Further, a link cover 3627 is attached to an upper front surface of the link member 3623. The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a parallel link by the motor base 3612, the action arm 3620 a of the first power receiving member 3620, the link arm 3622, and the link member 3623. Can be raised and lowered up and down the back four corner first decoration 3624 through the link member 3623.

  Furthermore, the back four corner first unit 3610 has a flat base cover 3628 which closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3611 and is attached to the unit base 3611, and a cylindrical receiving shaft member extending in the left and right direction. It has a second action pin 3629a that revolves around 3619, and is rotatably attached by the transmission shaft member 3619 penetrating between the motor base 3612 and the first transmission member 3620. In the transmission member 3616, the rotation from the second transmission portion 3618 is transmitted to rotate the second driven member 3629, and the second action pin 3629a of the second driven member 3629 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction And a first connecting pin 3630a extending cylindrically to the rear, and a unit block behind the transmission shaft member 3619. Mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a rotary connection member 3630 rotatably mounted by the base 3611 and the base cover 3628 and a unit base 3611 and a base cover 3628 below the rotary connection member 3630 And a back four corner second decorative body base 3631 having a second connecting pin 3631 a cylindrically protruding rearward at a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  Further, one end side of the back four corner first unit 3610 is rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3630 a of the rotary connection member 3630, and the opposite end side is the back four corner second decoration base 3631. A strip-shaped connecting arm 3632 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3631 a and a back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the front of the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 and extending in an arc shape The back four corners second decoration substrate 3634 attached to the back surface of the back four corners second decoration 3363 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back four corners second decoration 3363 attached to the back surface near the tip A substrate cover 3635 for covering a part of the rear side of the second decoration substrate 3634 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3616 attached to the motor base 3612. A back corner lift detection sensor 3636 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second receiving member 3629 has a disc-like second receiving main body portion 3629b with the second action pin 3629a protruding rightward from the peripheral edge and a second receiving main body portion 3629b centered on the receiving shaft member 3619. The second transmission slit 3629c is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the second transmission pin and the second transmission pin 3 And a pair of second lock recesses 3629d which are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3629c of the second driven member 3629 is open on the outer peripheral surface of the second driven main body 3629b is opposite to the second action pin 3629a with the driven shaft 3619 interposed therebetween. I'm facing. The second lock recess 3629 d is recessed in an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock projection 3618 b of the second transmission portion 3618. Further, the pair of second lock recesses 3629 d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotation center of the second power receiving member 3629 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  In a state in which the second receiving member 3629 is assembled with the back four corner first unit 3610 (back four corner movable presentation unit 3600), the second receiving main body 3629 b is a second transfer pin 3618 a of the second transfer portion 3618 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as the second lock projection 3618 b. Thus, the second transmission pin 3618a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3629c, and the rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3618a and the second transmission slit 3629c. In addition, a part of the second lock projection 3618b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3629d, and a part of the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3629 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotary connection member 3630 extends in a fan-shape from the rotation center in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a flat plate-like main body portion 3630b from which the first connection pin 3630a protrudes backward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface A projecting piece 3630c projecting in a shape of a circle, and a part of the projecting piece 3630c is notched so that the second action pin 3629a of the second power receiving member 3629 is slidably inserted toward the rear from the front end And two operated parts 3630 d.

  The rotational connection member 3630 is attached at the same height as the rotational center of the second power receiving member 3629. As the second driven member 3629 rotates and the second action pin 3629 a revolves, the second action receiving portion 3630 d is pressed and rotated by the second action pin 3629 a.

  The back four corners second decorative body 3633 is formed in a shape that looks over the cutting edge of a cutting tool such as a shuriken or a sword, and the narrowed side of the cutting edge is attached to the back four corner second decoration body base 3631.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 forms a rotation link by the base cover 3628, the rotation connection member 3630, the back four corner second decoration base 3361, and the connection arm 3632 and when the rotation connection member 3630 rotates The back four-corner second decoration base 3631 rotates in the same direction via the connection arm 3632. As a result, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 attached to the back four corner second decorative body base 3631 can be rotated (rotated) such that the front end side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 and the like, the back four corner second unit 3650 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a shallow box-like unit base 3651 which is open rearward and downward, and a unit base 3651. A shallow box-shaped motor base 3652 attached to the front and to the right of the motor base 3652, which is attached at approximately the center in the left-right direction and open on the right side (one facing the center of the back box 3010) It is attached to the motor base cover front 3653 that covers the front side of the open right side of the motor base 3652 in the front-rear direction and the right side of the motor base 3652 behind the motor base cover 3653 A box-shaped motor base cover 3504 after opening the left side and the front side and the left side of the motor base 3652 The rotary shaft is mounted on the front of the motor, and the rotary shaft is mounted on the rotary shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655 projecting inside the motor base 3652, and the right side is covered by the motor base cover front 3652 And a transmission member 3656 housed in the motor base 3652.

  The transmission member 3656 has a cylindrical attachment shaft 3656a attached to the rotation shaft of the back four corner drive motor 3655, a disk-like base 3656b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the attachment shaft 3656a, and a base A detection piece 3656c projecting in a plate shape rightward from a surface facing the right in the portion 3656b, a first transmission portion 3657 provided on the surface facing the right of the base portion 3656b, and a base portion And a second transmitting portion 3658 provided on the surface facing the left side of 3656 b.

  The first transmission portion 3657 of the transmission member 3656 is a cylindrical first transmission pin 3657a protruding rightward from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b in parallel with the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b, A cylindrical first lock projection 3657b concentrically protruding rightwardly from the right surface of the base portion 3656b with a radius smaller than the radius, and between the first lock projection 3657b and the first transmission pin 3657a, A notch is formed in a fan shape from the equal range on both sides of the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the first transmission pin 3657a on the outer peripheral surface of the first lock projection 3657b. And the first missing portion 3657c.

  The second transmission portion 3658 of the transmission member 3656 is a cylindrical second transmission pin 3658a projecting leftward parallel to the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the base portion 3656b, and a revolution of the second transmission pin 3658a A cylindrical second lock projection 3658b concentrically protruding leftward from the left surface of the base portion 3656b at a radius smaller than the radius, and between the second lock projection 3658b and the second transmission pin 3658a, From the equal range on both sides bordering on the axis connecting the center of the base portion 3656b and the center of the second transmission pin 3658a on the outer peripheral surface of the two lock projection 3658b, a fan-like notch is made toward the center of the second lock projection 3658b And a second cutaway portion 3658c.

  In the transmission member 3656, the revolution radius of the first transmission pin 3657a and the second transmission pin 3658a is the same. Further, the second transmission pin 3658a protrudes from a position rotated 180 degrees around the rotation axis of the base portion 3656b with respect to the first transmission pin 3657a. Furthermore, the diameters of the first lock projection 3657b and the second lock projection 3658b are the same. Furthermore, in the transmission member 3656, the first notched portion 3657c of the first transmission portion 3657 and the second cutaway portion 3658c of the second transmission portion 3658 are the circumferences of the first lock projection 3657b and the second lock projection 3658b. In contrast, it is fan-shaped at an angle range of 72 degrees.

  The back four corners second unit 3650 is a columnar transmission shaft member 3659 whose both ends are attached to the motor base 3652 and the motor base cover back 3554 at a position rearward of the transmission member 3656, and the transmission shaft The member 3659 has a working arm 3660a which is rotatably mounted by being penetrated and the rotation from the first transmission portion 3657 in the transmission member 3656 is transmitted and rotated to extend in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A first driven member 3660 and a link shaft member 3661 whose both ends are attached to the motor base 3652 and the rear of the motor base cover 3554 below the first driven member 3660 directly below the driven shaft member 3659 The link shaft member 3661 is rotatably attached by penetrating the proximal end side A link arm 3662 extending in the same direction as the action arm 3660a of the first receiving member 3660 in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and an upper end rotatably mounted on the tip of the action arm 3660a in the first receiving member 3660 The distal end of the link arm 3662 is rotatably mounted so that the link arm 3662 extends parallel to the working arm 3660a below the upper end and the lower end of the link member 3663 and the lower end of the link member 3663 The back four corners first decoration 3664 attached to the front and surfacing with a shuriken, and the back four corners first decoration substrate 3665 attached to the back of the back four corners first decoration 3664 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front And have.

  The first receiving member 3660 has a shaft portion 3660b extending from the left end with an operating arm 3660a and a penetrating transmission shaft member 3659, and extends in a direction perpendicular to the rotation shaft from the right end of the shaft portion 3660b A disc-shaped first receiving main body portion 3660c, and a first transmitting slit 3660d which is recessed toward the center from the outer peripheral surface of the first receiving main body portion 3660c and into which the first transmitting pin 3657a is slidably inserted; On both sides of the first transmission slit 3660 d on the outer peripheral surface of the first power receiving main body 3660 c, there are a pair of first lock recesses 3660 e which are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the first transmission slit 3660 d is open to the outer peripheral surface of the first power receiving main body 3660 c is substantially the same as the direction in which the action arm 3660 a extends. The first lock recess 3660 e is recessed in a circular arc having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the first lock projection 3657 b of the first transmission portion 3657. The pair of first lock recesses 3660e are formed such that the lines connecting the centers of the respective recessed arcs and the rotational center of the first power receiving member 3660 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the first power receiving member 3660 is assembled with the back four corner second unit 3650 (the back four corner movable effect unit 3600), the first power receiving body 3660 c is the first transmission pin 3657 a of the first transmission portion 3657 The position in the left-right direction is the same as the first lock projection 3657b. Thereby, the first transmission pin 3657a can be inserted into the first transmission slit 3660d, and rotation can be transmitted through the first transmission pin 3657a and the first transmission slit 3660d. In addition, a part of the first lock projection 3657b can be inserted into the first lock recess 3660e, and a part of the first lock projection 3657b is inserted into the first lock recess 3660e. The rotation of the transmitted member 3660 can be restricted (locked).

  The tip of the action arm 3660a of the first power receiving member 3660 and the tip of the link arm 3662 are rotatably attached to the link member 3663 by link pins 3666, respectively. In addition, a link cover 3667 is attached to the top of the front surface of the link member 3663. The back four corner second unit 3650 forms a parallel link by the motor base 3652, the action arm 3660a of the first power receiving member 3660, the link arm 3662, and the link member 3663, and the first power receiving member 3660 By rotating the back four corner first decorative body 3664 up and down via the link member 3663.

  Furthermore, the back four corner second unit 3650 has a flat base cover 3668 which closes the rear end opening of the unit base 3651 and is attached to the unit base 3651, and a cylindrical receiving shaft member extending in the left and right direction. It has a second action pin 3669a that revolves around 3659, and is rotatably attached by the transmission shaft member 3659 penetrating between the motor base 3652 and the first transmission member 3660. In the transmission member 3656, rotation from the second transmission portion 3658 is transmitted to rotate the second driven member 3669, and the second action pin 3669a of the second driven member 3669 revolves around an axis extending in the front-rear direction And a first connecting pin 3670a extending cylindrically to the rear, and a unit block behind the transmission shaft member 3659. Mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the unit base 3651 and the base cover 3668 below the rotary connection member 3670 and the rotary connection member 3670 rotatably mounted by the base 3651 and the base cover 3668 And a back four corner second decorative body base 3671 having a second connecting pin 3671 a cylindrically projecting rearward at a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  In addition, one end side of the back four corner second unit 3650 is rotatably attached to the first connection pin 3670 a of the rotary connection member 3670, and the opposite end side is the back four corner second decoration base 3671. A strip-like connecting arm 3672 rotatably attached to the second connecting pin 3671a, and a back four corner second decorative body 3673 attached to the front of the back four corner second decorative body base 3671 and extending in an arc shape And the back four corner second decoration substrate 3674 attached to the back surface of the back four corner second decoration 367 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back four corner second decoration 367 A substrate cover 3675 which covers a part of the rear side of the second decorative substrate 3674 and a detection piece 36 of the transmission member 3656 attached to the motor base 3652. A back corner lift detection sensor 3676 that can detect 6c, and a.

  The second driven member 3669 has a disk-like second driven main body 3669b with a second action pin 3669a protruding leftward from the peripheral edge and a second driven main body 3669b centered on the receiving shaft member 3659. Of the second transmission slit 3669c which is recessed from the outer peripheral surface toward the center and into which the second transmission pin 3658a is slidably inserted, and on both sides of the second transmission slit 3669c in the outer peripheral surface of the second receiving main body 3669b And a pair of second lock recesses 3669d which are recessed in an arc shape from the outer peripheral surface toward the center.

  The direction in which the second transmission slit 3669c of the second driven member 3669 is open on the outer peripheral surface of the second driven main body 3669b is opposite to the second action pin 3669a with the driven shaft member 3659 interposed therebetween. I'm facing. The second lock recess 3669 d is recessed in an arc having a slightly larger diameter than the diameter of the second lock projection 3658 b of the second transmission portion 3658. Further, the pair of second lock concave portions 3669 d are formed such that lines connecting the centers of the respective concave arcs and the rotation center of the second power receiving member 3669 intersect at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the second receiving member 3669 is assembled with the back four corner second unit 3650 (back four corner movable presentation unit 3600), the second receiving main body 3669 b is the second transfer pin 3658 a of the second transfer portion 3658 and The position in the left-right direction is the same as the second lock projection 3658b. Thus, the second transmission pin 3658a can be inserted into the second transmission slit 3669c, and rotation can be transmitted through the second transmission pin 3658a and the second transmission slit 3669c. In addition, a part of the second lock projection 3658b can be inserted into the second lock recess 3669d, and a part of the second lock projection 3658b is inserted into the second lock recess 3669d. The rotation of the transmitted member 3669 can be restricted (locked).

  The rotary connection member 3670 extends in a fan-shape from the rotation center in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a plate-like main body 3670b from which the first connection pin 3670a protrudes rearward from the periphery of the rear surface A projecting piece 3670c projecting in a shape of a circle, and a part of the projecting piece 3670c is notched so that the second action pin 3669a of the second transmitted member 3669 is slidably inserted toward the rear from the front end And a second operated portion 3670 d.

  The rotational connection member 3670 is mounted at the same height as the rotational center of the second power receiving member 3669. As the second driven member 3669 rotates and the second action pin 3669a revolves, the second action receiving portion 3670d is pressed and rotated by the second action pin 3669a.

  The back four corners second decorative body 3673 is formed in a shape in which the cutting edge of a cutting tool such as a shuriken or a sword is formed, and the narrowed side of the cutting edge is attached to the back four corners second decoration base 3671.

  The back four corners second unit 3650 forms a rotation link by the base cover 3668, the rotation connection member 3670, the back four corners second decoration base 3671 and the connection arm 3672, and when the rotation connection member 3670 rotates The back four-corner second decoration base 3671 rotates in the same direction via the connection arm 3672. Thereby, the back four corner second decoration 3672 attached to the back four corner second decoration base 3671 can be rotated (turned) so that the tip side thereof is directed downward.

  Subsequently, the operations of the back four corner first decorative body 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative body 3633, 3673 in the back four corner movable presentation unit 3600 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 to FIG. The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 includes a back four corner first unit 3610 and a back four corner second unit 3650; a back four corner second decoration 3633, 3673, a back four corner second decoration substrate 3634, 3674; Except for the above, they are formed substantially in left-right symmetry, and the back four corners second decorative body 3633, 33673, the back four corners second decorative substrate 3634, 3674, and the substrate covers 3635, 3675 are formed in point symmetry. Therefore, only the back four corner first unit 3610 (3610A) of the front right upper corner will be described here, and the description of the other back four corner first unit 3610 B and the back four corner second unit 3650 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) etc., the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 (back four corner first unit 3610) is in a state where the back four corner first decoration 3624 moving up and down is approaching the unit base 3611 In addition, the rotating back four corner second decoration 3363 extends horizontally. In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 are located at retracted positions hardly visible from the player side.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIGS. 144 (a) and 145 (a), in the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is positioned directly above the rotation center, and The second transmission pin 3618 a of the second transmission portion 3618 is located directly below the rotation center. Further, in a normal state, the action arm 3620a of the first power receiving member 3620 extends obliquely upward and forward, and the first transmission slit 3620d is opened obliquely upward and forward. The first lock projection 3617 b of the first transmission portion 3617 is inserted into the lower first lock recess 3620 e of Thus, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is located at the rising end via the link member 3623 and the first power receiving member 3620 is locked so as not to rotate.

  In the normal state, in the second driven member 3629, the second action pin 3629a is positioned obliquely upward and backward with respect to the rotation center, and the second transmission slit 3629c is opened obliquely downward and forward The second lock projection 3618b of the second transmission portion 3618 is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c. As a result, the back four corners second decoration 3363 extends substantially horizontally through the rotary connection member 3630, the connection arms 3632 and the back four corners second decoration base 3361, and the second output member 3629 can not rotate. It is locked. Furthermore, in the normal state, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner rise and fall detection sensor 3636.

  In this normal state, when the transmission member 3616 is rotated counterclockwise in left side view so that the first transmission pin 3617a of the first transmission portion 3617 is moved backward by the back four corner drive motor 3615, the first As the transmission pin 3617a revolves to move backward and enters into the first transmission slit 3620d of the first receiving member 3620, at the same time, the first lock projection 3617b comes out of the first lock recess 3620e and the lock As a result, the first power receiving member 3620 becomes rotatable. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner rise and fall detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detection state. Then, when the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the first transmission pin 3617a presses the inner surface of the first transmission slit 3620d downward, and the first receiving member 3620 receives the receiving shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

  When the first driven member 3620 is rotated clockwise in left side view, the tip of the acting arm 3620 a extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis is rotated so as to move downward, so that the first arm 3620 a The back four corner first decorative body 3624 is moved downward through the link member 3623 attached to the tip (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, since the link member 3623 is attached by a parallel link by the action arm 3620 a and the link arm 3622, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 moves downward in the posture as it is.

  On the other hand, in the second transmission portion 3618 of the transmission member 3616, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves in a direction away from the second driven member 3629, and the second lock projection 3618b is inserted into the second lock recess 3629d. The second receiving member 3629 does not rotate, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 does not rotate from the retracted position.

  Then, when the first transmission pin 3617a further revolves in the counterclockwise direction in left side view and is removed from the first transmission slit 3620d, the rotation of the first receiving member 3620 is stopped, and the back four corners first decoration The downward movement of the body 3624 is stopped (see FIGS. 143 (b) and 144 (c)). When the first transmission pin 3617a is disengaged from the first transmission slit 3620d, the first lock projection 3617b enters into the first lock recess 3620e above the first transmission slit 3620d, and the first lock projection 3617b The rotation of the first transmitted member 3620 is locked. Therefore, the first receiving member 3620 does not rotate in the clockwise direction any more, and the back four corner first decoration 3624 is maintained in the stopped state. In this state, as shown in FIG. 154, the back four corner first decoration 3624 is located within the frame of the center character 2500 and can be viewed from the player side. That is, the back four corner first decorative body 3624 is in the state of the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise direction in left side view) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 with the back four corner first decorative body 3624 in the appearance position, the opposite is the case. The first transmitting member 3620 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, and the back four corner first decorative body 3624 ascends through the action arm 3620 a and returns to the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (first transmission portion 3617), the rotation range in which the first transmission pin 3617a is inserted into the first transmission slit 3620d is the first specific rotation range.

  The back four corner first unit 3610 is a transmission member 3616 so that the second transmission pin 3618 a of the second transmission portion 3618 is moved rearward by the back four corner drive motor 3615 in a normal state (the state of FIG. 145 (a)). Is rotated clockwise in a left side view, the second transmission pin 3618a revolves to move backward, and enters the second transmission slit 3629c of the second receiving member 3629, The lock projection 3618 b is released from the inside of the second lock recess 3629 d and the lock is released, and the second power receiving member 3629 is in a rotatable state. In addition, the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 revolves, and the back four corner rise and fall detection sensor 3636 is in a non-detection state. Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves in the clockwise direction, the second transmission pin 3618a presses the inner surface of the second transmission slit 3629c upward, and the second receiving member 3629 centers the receiving shaft member 3619. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction.

  When the second receiving member 3629 rotates counterclockwise in left side view, the second action pin 3629a of the second receiving member 3629 revolves to move downward, and the second action pin 3629a moves downward. Along with the movement, the rotary connection member 3630 rotates about an axis (counterclockwise direction in a front view) extending forward and backward so that the second operated portion 3630d of the rotary connection member 3630 moves downward. Then, when the rotary connection member 3630 rotates, the back four corner second decoration base 3631 connected by the connection arm 3632 rotates in the same direction as the rotation connection member 3630 and is attached to the back four corner second decoration base 3631 The back four corner second decorative body 3633 is also rotated in the same direction (the direction in which the tip side moves downward, that is, the direction around anti-blood discharge in front view) (see FIG. 145 (d)).

  On the other hand, in the first transmission portion 3617 of the transmission member 3616, the first transmission pin 3617a revolves in the direction away from the first power receiving member 3620, and the first lock projection 3617b is inserted into the first lock recess 3620e. The first receiving member 3620 does not rotate, and the back four corner first decorative body 3624 does not move from the retracted position.

  Then, when the second transmission pin 3618a further revolves clockwise in left side view and disengages from the second transmission slit 3629c, the rotation of the second receiving member 3629 stops, and the back four corners second decorative body The downward rotation of the tip end side of 3633 stops (see FIGS. 143 (c) and 145 (c)). When the second transmission pin 3618a is disengaged from the second transmission slit 3629c, the second lock projection 3618b enters the second lock recess 3629d above the second transmission slit 3629c, and the second lock projection 3618b causes the second lock projection 3618b to The rotation of the second member 3629 is locked. Therefore, the second power receiving member 3629 does not rotate in the counterclockwise direction any more, and the back four corner second decoration 3363 is maintained in the state of stopping rotation. In this state, as shown in FIG. 143 (c), the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is inclined at about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and as shown in FIG. 153, the back four corner second decoration 3363 is a center. It can be viewed from the player side through the frame of the bonus 2500. That is, the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is in the state of the appearance position.

  When the transmission member 3616 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise direction in left side view) by the back four corner drive motor 3615 with the back four corner second decoration 3363 in the appearance position, the opposite direction is reversed. The second receiving member 3629 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the back four corner second decorative body 3633 is rotated so that the tip end side is raised via the rotary connection member 3630, the connection arm 3632 and the like. , Return to the normal state (state of retracted position). Then, when the detection piece 3616c of the transmission member 3616 is detected by the back four corner elevation detection sensor 3636, the rotation (drive) of the back four corner drive motor 3615 is stopped. In the present embodiment, in the transmission member 3616 (second transmission portion 3618), the rotation range in which the second transmission pin 3618a is inserted in the second transmission slit 3629c is the second specific rotation range.

  Thus, the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 causes the back four corner first decoration 3624, 3664 to appear or the back four corner second decoration 3363, 363 to appear by the rotation of one back four corner drive motor 3615, 3655. In the upper right corner, the back four corner first unit 3610A, the lower left corner back four corner first unit 3610B, the upper left corner back four corner second unit 3650A, and the lower right corner back four corner second unit 3650B, Since each of them can be operated independently, it is possible to present a more varied moving effect to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[5-10. Moveable production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 146 to FIG. FIG. 146 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front movable movable body of the front movable movable effect unit in the center character. Further, FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing the state of the back decoration of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit at the first appearance position, and FIG. 148 is a back view of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state of the appearance position in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decoration body and the back bottom front second decoration body of the back bottom front movable effect unit.

  Further, FIG. 149 shows that the pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit directed forward, and the back left rotation of the back left movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left projecting decorative body in a state where the first decorative surface of the decorative body is directed forward. Further, FIG. 150 shows a game board showing the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of. Further, FIG. 151 shows a game board showing the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective third decoration surfaces directed to the front. It is a front view of.

  Further, FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back and back rotation decorative body of the back and back back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view at the rising end position. Further, FIG. 153 shows that the back decoration of the back turning movable presentation unit in the back unit is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view at the rising end position, and the back four corners second turning second of the back four corners movable presentation unit It is a front view of the game board in which a decoration body shows the state of an appearance position. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corners movable presentation unit in the back unit in a state of an appearance position.

  In this gaming board 5, as shown in FIG. 83 and the like, in the normal state, the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 disposed behind through the frame of the center character 2500 is well viewed from the player side can do. Also, in the normal state, the front movable decorative body 2561 of the front movable movable effect unit 2560 in the center character 2500 is rising, and the first rotary decorative body 2572 of the front movable movable unit 2570, the second rotary decoration The body 2573 and the third rotating decoration 2574 stop rotating. Furthermore, in the normal state, the back top decoration 3152 of the back top movable effect unit 3100 is located at a retracted position above and behind the frame of the center character 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part is It projects downward below the upper side in the frame of the center role 2500 and can be viewed from the player side.

  In a normal state, the first lower back decoration 3209 and the second lower back decoration 3212 of the lower back fore movable effect unit 3200 become the back of the lower part of the center character 2500 and viewed from the player side. It is located in a difficult withdrawal position. In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotating decoration 3310 and the back left rotating decoration 3410 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 have the first decoration surfaces 3310a and 3410a forward (front), respectively. It has stopped rotating in the state of facing it, and a pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotation decoration 3310 is closed and two back left projecting decorations 3421 of the back left rotation decoration 3410 are back left rotation decoration It is located at a retracted position where it is embedded into the body 3410 in an invisible manner.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back decoration of the back of the movable effect unit 3500 is located at the falling end position, and the lower part of the center character 2500 is visible from the player side. I am in the frame. Also, in the normal state, the back four corner first decorative body 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative body 3633, 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are within the frame of the center character 2500 that is difficult for the player to see It is also located at the outward retraction position.

  From the normal state, this gaming board 5 is displayed on the surface according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Moveable production unit 2560, front down moveable production unit 2570, back up moveable production unit 3100, back down front moveable production unit 3200, back right moveable presentation unit 3300, back left moveable production unit 3400, back down moveable production unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front movable movable effect unit 2560 of the center character 2500, the front movable movable body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotation drive of the front drive motor 2563, and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is obtained. Position it on the top front (see Figure 146). Thereby, the upper part of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is covered by the movable decorative body 2561 to make it possible for the player to think that the gaming state may change, and the expectation for the game is enhanced. be able to.

  Further, in the upside-down movable effect unit 2570 of the center character 2500, the first downturn decoration 2572, the second downturn decoration 2573, and the third downturn decoration 2574 are rotated by the under-back drive motor 2575 in a lump ( See FIG. 96 (b)). This makes it possible for the player to think that something is good, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Furthermore, in the back-up movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back-up decorative body 3152 is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position in a state where the back-up decorative body 3152 is reversed by rotating the back-up drive motor 3103 See Figure 147). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the back surface decoration 3152 and the sub decoration 3157a facing in the openings 3152a may be partially viewed from the player side through the center character 2500 frame. it can. This makes it possible for the player to be surprised as well as being entertained by the appearance of the character, since the predetermined character being scolded by the back surface decoration body 3152 looks upside down from above. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Also, in this state, when the back upper sub decoration 3157 is reciprocated to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159, the pupil of the predetermined character being crawled by the back upper decoration 3152 (sub decoration 3157a ) Can be surprised to the left and right, which can further surprise the player and can enjoy the movable effect.

  In the back-up movable effect unit 3100, the back-up decorative body 3152 is moved to the second appearance position further below by the rotation drive of the back-up drive motor 3103 with the back-up decorative body 3152 in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 148). When the top and bottom of the predetermined character being scooped by the back top decoration 3152 is reversed when the back top decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom are in a normal state As it descends while rotating, the motion of the back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic motion, which can strongly attract the player's attention and can greatly surprise the player.

  When the back surface decoration body 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the figure, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being scooped by the back surface decoration body 3152 is in a normal state, and the back top decoration body 3152 is It is located approximately in the center of the frame of center character 2500. As a result, the back surface decoration body 3152 becomes noticeable in the game area 5a, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to foretell that the advantageous game state will occur. . Even in this second appearance position, the pupils of the predetermined character being scolded by the back decoration 3152 can be reciprocated to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper auxiliary drive motor 3159, which makes the player more enjoyable. Can.

  In the back up movable effect unit 3100, the back up decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, or moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retreat position And the second appearance position can be raised and lowered, and at the time of the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the pupil can not be made to move around, so those operations can be appropriately performed. A variety of movable effects can be performed by combining them, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In the back lower movable executability unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is at the second appearance position, the back of the back lower drive motor 3202 rotates the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 148). Thus, as shown in the figure, the first lower back decoration 3209 with the hand in front of it is positioned in front of the upper back decoration 3152 with the head (face) in front of it, so that the predetermined character casts a spell. As a result, the player can have a strong impact, and the expectation for the generation of the advantageous gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in the normal state (the state where the first decorative surface 3310 is turned forward and stopped). Then, the inner decoration 3313 is faced forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 149), and the inner decoration 3313 is lit and decorated. Thus, it is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state changes, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the second decoration surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). Thereby, since the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decorative surface 3310b can be viewed from the player side, the player can be made to foretell the arrival of a chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Further, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decorative body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the third decoration surface 3310c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 spirally extending in the vertical direction in the back right rendering space 3321 can be viewed from the player side, so the gaming balls are supplied to the player in the back right rendering space 3321. In other words, it can be made that the upper prize winning opening 2006 opens, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decoration solenoid 3422 in a normal state (the state where the first decorative surface 3410 is turned forward and stopped). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 149). This makes it possible to surprise the player by projecting the back left projecting decorative body 3421 from the cylindrically rotating back left rotating decorative body 3410, and at the same time it is thought that something is good. Can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is rotated in a giraffe by the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3404. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state changes, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decoration surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 83 etc.). Since the first decoration surface 3410 a is provided with a door decoration 3411 that simulates a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decoration surface 3310 a of the back right rotation decoration 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 is provided to the player. Similarly, the door decoration 3411 can be thought to be open, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the second decoration surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 150). As a result, since the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410 b can be viewed from the player side, the player can be made to foretell the arrival of a chance by the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the third decoration surface 3410 c forward (front) (see FIG. 151). And although illustration is omitted, when red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decoration substrate 3417 in this state, the red design can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415, and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue design can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained or the expectation can be heightened.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 rotate the back right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time as the right and left ends within the frame of the center character 2500 ( Movable effects can be performed on the left and right sides of the central liquid crystal display 1500, and the player's expectation is enhanced by the rotating back right rotation decoration 3310 and the back left rotation decoration 3410 to suppress a decrease in interest be able to. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surface on which the back right rotation decoration 3310 and the back left rotation decoration 3410 are stopped, the pattern of the movable effect can be diversified, and the player can not easily get bored. .

  Furthermore, in the back-to-back rear movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-to-back back-and-back drive motor 3512 is rotationally driven to raise the back end back rotation decoration 3568 Rise to Then, when the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 is at the rising end position, the back bottom back rotation rotation motor 3553 rotates the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 152). ). As a result, the back and back rotary ornament 3568 slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 is raised and positioned in the center of the center character 2500 frame, thereby the player. Can make you think that there is something good to surprise you, and can increase your sense of expectation for the game. In addition, it is possible for the player to further increase the sense of expectation for the game by turning the rotating decorative body 3568 back and forth in the counterclockwise direction.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, when the back-to-back rotary decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-to-back back-to-back rotary decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front. Then, the four back and back rotating ornaments 3568 open and enlarge so as to be separated from each other (see FIG. 153). As a result, the diameter of the lower back turning decorative body 3568 is larger than that when it is rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation for the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the back four corner movable presentation unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 from the retracted position by rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. Elevate to the emerging position (see Figure 154). This makes it possible to surprise the player by the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664, and to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner second decoration 3633, 3673 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center character 2500 by the rotational drive of the back four corner drive motor 3615, 3655. Move (see Figure 153). This allows the player to be surprised by the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 extending radially around the center of the center character 2500, and something good It can be made to think that there is, and it can be made to raise expectation for a game. In the back four corners movable effect unit 3600, when the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is at the rising end position, by rotating the back four corners second decoration 3633, 3673 to the appearance position, the center It can appear as if a large shuriken appeared in the frame of the character 2500 (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to convince the player of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing performed by the main control board (in particular, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board) will be described. FIG. 155 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the main control board according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Initialize the data stored in the built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. Also, if the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board according to the operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU is input the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is executed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the main control built-in RAM. Then, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch is not operated, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Execute recovery processing to recover to the state according to the information. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board according to this embodiment, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display at the time of the variable display stop. Special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to lottery processing for display mode, fluctuation random number to be subjected to lottery processing for predetermined time required for fluctuation display control of the special symbol (variation time) If a big hit is made based on the above-mentioned special random number, a reach random number to be subjected to a lottery process whether or not to execute reach production as a game effect to be executed by the central liquid crystal display 1500 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. The symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) to be subjected to lottery processing for determining the type of big hit when it is determined, the operation trigger of the second start opening door member 2323 Etc. random number is subjected to such a lottery process to drop (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 mS.

  FIG. 155 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (b), in the interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper large winning opening sensor 2552, the lower large winning opening sensor 2354, the general winning opening sensor 3050 Detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number counter (the special random number, the ordinary random number) related to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol among the random numbers is updated The operation is performed.

  And after updating the random numbers in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board performs special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol as the processing of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a second that indicates the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for a hit when the second start opening door member 2323 is triggered. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board is controlled such that the drive frequency of the second starting opening door member 2323 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (except for some big hits). It becomes a structure which performs a lottery process (what is called time saving state). In this embodiment, such a time saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (referred to as time saving control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to one-half (per 100%) and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is not The second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is for example, shortened when shortening to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the time saving state and the lottery result of the above normal symbol is hit. After moving forward for 5.5 seconds to enable the reception of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004, the game is retracted again to disable the reception of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-saving control, the second symbol is set by setting the selection probability of the normal symbol to 0% and setting the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) It becomes impossible to accept the game ball to the mouth 2004. It should be noted that the winning probability of the normal symbol may be 0% or more even in the non-time-short state, and in this case the winning probability (for example 50%) lower than that of the time-short state When the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 becomes shorter than the short time state, for example, for 2 seconds, it is possible to receive the game ball to the second start opening 2004 again. You may make it back and make acceptance of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 impossible.

  That is, in the non-time-short state, since the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%, it is impossible to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 even if the player strikes right in this case. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win in the first start hole 2002 instead of the second start hole 2004 (so-called "left It is preferred to strike ").

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and in order to advance the second starting opening door member 2323 of the second starting opening 2004 for a long period (in this example, 5.5 seconds), In this case, winning the game ball to the second start port 2004 is facilitated by hitting the right. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win the second start hole 2004 instead of the first start hole 2002 (so-called "right It is preferred to strike ").

  In addition, as the time saving control, control to increase the winning probability of the normal symbol above the non-time short state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol above the non-time short state, the second start opening 2004 Control to extend the period for advancing the second start opening door member 2323 more than the non-short time state, control to increase the number of times for advancing the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 above the non-short time state, first Control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display or the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the central liquid crystal display 1500) shorter than the non-time-short state Any one or any combination (or all) may be performed.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board or the like. Next, in step S17, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process processing is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as the process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU of the main control board performs, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper large winning opening sensor 2552, and the lower large winning opening sensor 2354. When the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 3050 or the like is in the on state, the payout control command is output to the above-mentioned payout control board so that the winning balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 to pay the player a prize ball. In the present example, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 and the first starting opening sensor 2107 is turned on, "three balls", the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting is When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, "one ball", the game ball is won in the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 or lower large winning opening sensor 2354 When the game ball is in the "14 ball" when the game state is on and the game ball is in the general prize hole 2001 and the general prize hole sensor 3050 is in the on state, "10 ball" will be paid out to the player. ing.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board executes storage processing of checking the increase and decrease of the number of holdings next as processing of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By this control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU of the main control board first detects the first start port sensor 2107 On condition that the signal is in the on state (the first start opening 2002 is entered) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and the main control built-in RAM The first starting opening passage process such as storing in the first special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2325 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2004 is entered) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol and the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol is "4R normal big hit" , When it comes to a mode that suggests either "4R latent probability big hit" or "4R definite variation big hit", the lower large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the lower large winning opening 4R big hit gaming state (it's just long open 4R big hit gaming state) which repeats opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that 9 gaming balls are won in 2005 It may be called to control, and as a result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the change display stop of the first special symbol, it became the mode which suggests "16R sudden probability big hit" Control the 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the short open 16R big hit gaming state) which repeats the opening and closing pattern to close 16 times after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example 0.5 seconds) When the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol becomes the mode which suggests "8R probability variation big hit", the lower large winning a prize mouth 2005 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 After the second opening / closing pattern to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that nine gaming balls have won the second large winning opening 2005 after the second large winning opening 2005 is shorted Control the 8R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the long open 8R big hit gaming state) that repeats the opening and closing pattern to be closed 8 times after opening the time (for example 0.5 seconds) And when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the upper large winning a prize mouth 2006 open for a long time (for example 28.5 16R big hit gaming state (simply open for a long time) repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the above-mentioned large winning a prize mouth sensor 2552 that 9 game balls are won after winning a second big winning prize opening 2006 16R big hit game state may be called) to execute processing to control. It should be noted that the lower prize winning opening sensor 2354 detects that nine gaming balls have won in the lower prize winning opening 2005 after opening the lower prize winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) as the 4R big hit gaming state The opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when being displayed is repeated four times, but the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 12 times thereafter By actually executing the 4R big hit gaming state control, even when the big hit gaming state is reached, the open / close pattern for controlling the lower large winning opening 2005 to be always opened and closed 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit It is good, after having opened the lower large winning a prize opening 2005 for a long time as an 8R big hit gaming state (for example 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the lower large winning a prize opening 2005 The opening and closing pattern to be closed when detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and then the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is not performed You may do so. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of rounds capable of receiving the game ball in the lower large winning opening 2005 is substantially the same, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a game is mainly performed based on a left-handed state in which a game based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 2002 is executed and a game mainly based on the game ball in the second start port 2004 Control to either of the right-handed state and the left-handed state. Specifically, when the time saving control is being performed, control is performed in the right-handed state, and when time reduction control is not performed, control is performed in the left-handed state. In the left-handed state, a big hit gaming state of up to 8 rounds of long time opening is executed, and in the right-handed state, a big hit gaming state of up to 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. It is possible to obtain more balls than in the left-handed state.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of such big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), each set processing of high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving number counter Run. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 161 described later and is set until the next big hit occurs (the first shown in FIG. 166 described later). Special symbol stop processing or second special symbol stop processing not shown).

  The short-time flag is a flag indicating that time-shortening control is being executed (low probability time short state, high probability time short state), and a big hit (time low control state, low probability time short state) is performed after the big hit gaming state is over 4R probability variation big hit, 16R hit probability hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R big hit gaming state based on) is set when you end the big hit game state, when it becomes the next big hit the first special symbol stop processing which is shown in Figure 166 which it mentions later Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S37), the first special symbol process processing including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38) The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S37) Process processing is performed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 2107 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 157. In step S41, the main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value (upper limit based on this counter value) It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S41. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value (if so-called "irregular sphere" occurs), the first special symbol variation display Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S43 to step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area among the storage areas of the main control built-in RAM (step S45), by finishing the process, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2325 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. In step S51, the main control MPU of the main control board first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value It is determined whether it is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S51. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value (if so-called "irregular ball" occurs), the variation display of the second special symbol Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S53 to step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S55), by finishing the process, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, a command (first suspension) indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) Set the number specification command 0 to 4) and send it to the peripheral control board, and the above storage process (step S20) when the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 Set the command (second hold number specification command 0 to 4) to instruct the hold number of the second special symbol in) and send it to the peripheral control board. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area on the basis of the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, a command to notify the random number (first irregular ball specification command) is also described above. When a random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the game ball having been set by storage processing and transmitted to the peripheral control board and the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the random number is notified The command to be executed (the second ball designating command) is also set by the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board. In addition, when the first and second ball commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board in the storage process, the memory contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared.

  FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special random symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is executed such as lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol Normal processing (step S80)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )

  3. Lottery processing for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the above first special symbol display based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)

  5. The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit displays the above-mentioned first special symbol display mode when the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 155).

  FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S101. As processing, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM as processing of step S102. The same main control built-in RAM is the random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol Read from Then, next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) relating to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state) when the current gaming state is high (step S111), the big hit at the high probability shown in FIG. The judgment table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the big hit judgment table at the low probability shown in FIG. 162A is selected (step S113). The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 162A, the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time short) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) The jackpot determination table for low probability used in the case of the state and the low probability time reduction state, and the jackpot determination at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability time short state) And a table. And, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of first special random number is won in the jackpot, and the first 399 kinds of first random numbers The first special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier judgment value indicating that the special random numbers are the above outliers (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, the first special random number Matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won as a jackpot similarly to the low probability big hit judgment table to be referred to for comparison with the above, and the 399 kinds of second special random numbers deviate from the above The second special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range judgment value indicating that the value is (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400).

  Also, in the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, 10 kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit judgment value, and 390 kinds of first special random numbers become out of judgment value The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, the first special random number is determined in the high probability big hit determination table to be compared with the second special random number. Similar to the high probability big hit judgment table to be referred to for comparison with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won for the big hit, 390 kinds of second special random numbers are not included above The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range judgment value indicating that the (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). It should be noted that the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table to be compared with the first special random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to in order to be compared with the second special random number (the number of jackpot judgment values is the same number The jackpot judgment value may be made different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be made different (the jackpot probability may be made different). In this case, at least one of the jackpot judgment values of the jackpot judgment table at the low probability and the jackpot judgment table at the high probability may be made different (both may be made different).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) Then, a big hit flag is set to indicate that the variation has been won as a big hit (step S116), and the big hit determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S115 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, the reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and when the gaming state is high probability short state Reach determination table in the high probability time short state to be used in the case, reach determination table in the low probability state used in the low probability state (low probability short time state and low probability time short state), and Is equipped. Then, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, it is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one kind of reach random number reaches the reach, and matched with the reach determination value indicating that the 71 reach random numbers do not reach The reach random numbers are associated with one another.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time reduction state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 random numbers reach, and the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability low state and the low probability state (low probability low state, low probability non-short state). Be enhanced.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the change is determined to be out of reach (step S120), the variation is A reach flag indicating that a reach will be made is set, and the process is ended (step S121).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs the first special symbol process symbol setting process. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of one special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit judging process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 162 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing and selection. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the designated symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 162 (B), the symbol determination table has random numbers according to the determination results (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls The game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 by repeating the pattern 4 times (easily) to control the 4R big hit gaming state, and then the low probability short time until the big hit gaming state occurs (so-called normal state) Control to 4R usually a big hit.

  2. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls The game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easier) to enter the lower big winning opening 2005 by repeating the pattern 4 times, and then to the high probability non-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, high 4R latent probability big hit that performs the effect that it is difficult to determine that it is controlled to the probability state.

  3. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls Control the game ball to enter the lower large winning opening 2005 (easy) 4R big hit gaming state by repeating the pattern 4 times, and then control to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs next .

  4. The game ball controls the 16R big hit gaming state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning prize port 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower big winning prize port 2005 for a short time (for example 0.5 seconds) 16 times The game is controlled to a high probability time short state until a big hit gaming state occurs, and a transition to a high probability time short state is suddenly controlled without occurrence of a big hit gaming state in the middle of the game.

  5. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls After repeating the pattern eight times, the game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (easy ) 8R probability variation big hit to control to 8R big hit gaming state, and then to high probability time short status until big hit gaming state occurs.

  6. Opening and closing that is detected when the upper prize winning opening sensor 2006 detects that nine gaming balls have won in the upper prize winning opening 2006 after opening the upper prize winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) The game ball is controlled to 16R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easier) 16R big hit game state by repeating the pattern 16 times, then it is controlled to high probability time short state until big hit game state occurs next .

  In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the driving of the second starting opening door member 2323 is not performed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 will occur, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display is executed, the big hit related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive probability big hit, 8R positive variation Jackpot) will occur. Similarly, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R low probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) associated with the second special symbol will occur.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol it was possible to repeat the opening and closing pattern which opens the lower large winning a prize mouth 2005 for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) at maximum, related to the second special symbol In the big hit, the opening and closing pattern for opening the large winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( For example, the above-mentioned large winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined to the 8R probability variation big hit which repeats the opening and closing pattern to 28.5 seconds 8 times ) Based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 mainly to set the ratio (63%) determined to 16R probability variation big hit that repeats opening and closing patterns 16 times approximately twice Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit symbol as big hit symbol, and when it is decided to 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol. If you decide and decide on 4R probability variation big hit, decide on 4R probability variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, if you decide on 16R probability big hit symbol, decide on 16R high probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol and decide on 8R positive variation big hit Decide on the 8R probability variation big hit symbol as a big hit symbol. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to be 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent as a big hit symbol. Big hit symbol is decided, if it is decided to 4R definite variation big hit, it decides to 4R definite variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, when it decides to 16R positive variation big hit, it decides to 16R positive variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol.

  In addition, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board determines that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the variation stop state (step S136), and counts the above big hit interval The counter is incremented by 1 (step S135 b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board, as the process of step S137, indicates the above lottery result (type of big hit, reach out, or out ((No. The determination result notification command according to each lottery result is set so that the mode of the stop symbol of one special symbol may be indicated)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board controls the display of the central liquid crystal display 1500 based on the received judgment result notification command and fluctuation pattern command (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed to display the left decoration The stop display is made in the order of design → right decoration design → middle decoration design (in addition, the left, middle and right decoration designs may be synchronously displayed in the same pattern and may be displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU specifies a 4R normal big hit among the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500. 4R normal big hit design (the left, middle and right decorative design is the combination which becomes the same even pattern among the design of “0”-“9”), when 4 R latent certain big hit is specified among the big hit The 4R latent confirmation big hit design (the combination of the left, middle and right decorative designs similar to the 4R normal big hit design from “0” to “9” will be the same even design among the decorative designs), Among them, when 4R certainty big hit is specified, it is decided as 4R certain variation big hit symbol (combination that all left, middle and right decorative symbols become “1” or “9”), and 16R certainty big hit among big hit is specified 16R sudden confirmation big hit Designated as a pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols including “1”, “3” and “5”) and specified 8R of the big hit out of the big hit 8R positive variation big hit Design (combination that all left, middle and right decorative designs are "5") is decided, and 16R certain variation big hit designs (left, middle and right decorative designs are all identified) when you identify 16R positive variation out of the big hit It is determined to be the combination of “7”. In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) If it is decided to be a symbol) and the detachment is specified, it is decided to be a different symbol (a combination of at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle and right decorative symbols) with reach reaching When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect is ended), the display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 164, the main control MPU of the main control board sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set If it is (step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal disconnection (reach effect If it is not performed, select the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of (Step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display only for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the central liquid crystal display 1500 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the 241 types of fluctuating random numbers, 164 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of fluctuating random numbers are super reach A judgment value (223 to 240) which is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and indicates that 18 kinds of fluctuating random numbers are to execute any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability. Set as). Note that with super reach effect, the expectation of the big hit is higher than that of normal reach effect, and the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach effect is executed for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It is getting higher.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.3 seconds as a time saving state Is set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short time state. As described above, the variation time of the first special symbol is made the same in the short time state and in the short time state, and the player is urged to win the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the short time state. The time for winning the game ball to the mouth 2004 is secured.

  In addition, as described above, in the right-handed state, only the interval where one game ball can pass is provided, and the rolling of the game ball is limited, and guidance to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 is very high probability. Be done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability, the normal symbol comes into contact, and the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is advanced. In this case, the game balls are received by the second starting opening 2004 with a very high probability (approximately all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500). Moreover, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to be 100%, and when the normal symbol comes into contact, the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is a long period (5.5 in this example) It is maintained in the advanced state for a second), and the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. In the present example, when the player is operating the operation handle 504, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, since the game ball is received to the second start port 2004 with extremely high probability when the launched game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500, the second start port door of the second start port 2004 in a short time state In a state where the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004, the game ball in the second start port 2004 is generated at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is set to 0.3 seconds which is extremely short as the fluctuation time of the time saving state. . In addition, the interval time from when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the fluctuation display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the time saving state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-time short state (fluctuating time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is narrowed in the time saving state, even if a large number of gaming balls win in a very short time to the second starting opening 2004, the second special symbol The variable display is performed in a very short time to prevent the increase in the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and in the above-described short time state, the number of variable displays per unit time increases significantly as compared with the non-short time state. As a result, in the high probability time-shortened state controlled to shift to the right-handed state, it becomes possible to win the next big hit in a very short time compared to the previous gaming machine, and it becomes possible to obtain a large number of winning balls in a short time. , The game interest can be improved.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S171, as shown in FIG. 165. As a process, the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) in the process of step S173, this process is ended.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, the main control MPU of the main control board first performs step S181. As processing, while performing display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays the first special symbol. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board (step S182).

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187), and the big hit gaming state A standby time until the start of (a time to display a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value (step S194), this processing is ended. The big hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board, and is prepared individually according to the type of big hit. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R low probability big hit) according to the type of big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R low probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R high probability big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) Set the start command, 4R probability variation big hit start command, 16R hit probability big hit start command, 8R probability variation big hit start command, 16R probability variation big hit start command). As a result, an effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

[7. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 167, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes 2 mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady-state process, a process to count up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16mS elapsed While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS lapse flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS lapse flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS lapse flag T is set.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart of an example of 16 mS steady-state processing performed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the central processing based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the second fluctuation pattern setting process) Control processing related to the liquid crystal display device 1500 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more by the end of the 16 mS steady process after the 16 mS steady process starts, the 16 mS steady process immediately after the 16 mS steady process starts (command from step S601) Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16mS has elapsed during execution of the 16mS steady process, only the 16mS elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16mS steady process is completed, the 16mS steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub main processing and the 16 mS steady processing.

[8. Battle production]
Next, the winning time shortening control, which is an essential part of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 169 and 173 show that the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out, reach per reach) is received when controlled to the high probability time short state are the above command analysis 171 is a timing chart of battle effect executed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is specified in the process (step S601), and FIG. 171 to FIG. 173 show the reach and when it is controlled to the high probability time short state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a battle effect performed by the central liquid crystal display device 1500 when it is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command indicating that it is received is specified in the command analysis process (step S601). is there.

  In this example, the main liquid crystal display device 1500 displays a mode of walking on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 during the high probability time-short state, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced at the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. To perform variable display. Then, when the determination result notification command indicating the reach and the fluctuation pattern command are received, the enemy character 1500b is displayed so as to face the main character 1500a, and the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b are confronted. Execute battle rendition. Then, when the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, the main character 1500a displays a mode in which the main character 1500a wins the enemy character 1500b as a result of the battle effect, and when the received determination result notification command indicates a release, As a result of the battle effect, an aspect in which the main character 1500a loses to the enemy character 1500b is displayed.

  In the battle effect, the main liquid crystal 1500 displays the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b facing each other on the central liquid crystal display 1500, and then blackout (displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500 by turning off the screen) Can not be visually recognized, and then one of the main character 1500a and the enemy character 1500b is displayed. It is indicated that a first strike attack is to be made by the character displayed after this blackout, and if the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout, it will always be a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after blackout, it is always a big hit if the attack of the enemy character 1500b is avoided. As described above, the player can recognize that the main character 1500a is displayed after the blackout and becomes a big hit, and by avoiding the attack of the enemy character 1500b even when the enemy character 1500b is displayed after the blackout. It becomes possible to recognize that it will be a big hit.

  In this way, even if it is decided that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, the battle production is continued after that and the fluctuation display is executed over a long period of time, the special symbol per unit time Since the number of times of the variable display decreases and the number of times of winning the big hit gaming state and the expected value of the winning balls that can be obtained decrease, the player may be disadvantaged and the fun of the game may be lowered. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) is controlled open at that time to control the big hit gaming state While starting, it is made to continue the production to execute the battle production to the end. The details will be described below.

  In this example, battle production short and battle production long are provided as fluctuation patterns when reaching during high probability time reduction state, and battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, and battle production long is a big hit and It is designed to be executed both in the case of and in the case of being out of place. First, the battle effect performed based on the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 and 171 (A) to 172 (I). In the high probability time-short state, since the above-mentioned right-handed game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 2004, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays that effect (right-handed →) There is.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability time short state, the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character 1500a is moving on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. When the second special symbol process process (step S39) is executed based on the game ball having won the second starting opening 2004 in that state, the main control MPU displays the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 169. The variation display of the second special symbol is started on the display, and the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the judgment result notification command indicating a big hit in this case and the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short are displayed on the peripheral control board) Sending a fluctuation pattern command). When the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU fluctuates and displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size at the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display 1500. When the variation time specified by the pattern command has elapsed, all the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, when reaching (reaching or not, reaching, and big hit) is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU, the main character 1500a is stopped and the The mode which noticed is displayed (FIG. 171 (B)).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU causes the enemy liquid character 1500b to appear on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 so as to face the main character 1500a (FIG. 171 (C)), and then black out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (FIG. Figure 171 (D)). Then, it is shown that the received judgment result notification command will be a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) to continue the high probability time-short state, and the fluctuation pattern command instructs execution of the battle production short fluctuation pattern If so, the peripheral control MPU gradually brightens the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to cause only the main character 1500a to float up, and the reduced size is displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display device 1500. The player is notified that a big hit will be made by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol in a big hit mode (big hit symbol) and displaying "big hit confirmed!" (FIG. 171 (E)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, the variation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially the same as the variation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500. The jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing during the battle effect that matches and blacks out the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 and causes only the main character 1500a to float up. The main control MPU starts open control of the special winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) based on the stop display of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Also, when opening control of the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) is started by the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU displays "big hit confirmed!" To control the big hit gaming state. Can be made to recognize that control of the jackpot gaming state is to be started, and the player suffers a disadvantage without noticing that control of the jackpot gaming state is started. You can suppress that. It should be noted that the voice output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is started (a big hit is started. The right hit is not limited to the above example, as long as it allows the player to surely recognize that the control of the big hit gaming state is started. ), Or may be displayed to notify the start of the big hit (start big hit) or the like.

  The peripheral control MPU continues to execute the battle effect even after the control of the big hit gaming state is started by the main control MPU as shown in FIG. 169, and displays a mode in which the main character 1500a attacks the enemy character 1500b. (FIG. 172 (F)). Next, the peripheral control MPU causes the central liquid crystal display device 1500 to display "Press the button and put a stop!" And start the timer to start measuring the effective period (Fig. 172 (G)). On the basis of the fact that the dish effect button 257 is operated and the detection signal from the effect button press sensor 258 is input to the peripheral control MPU, the lifting unit 3510 retracts the back and back rotating ornament unit 3550 so that it can not be seen from the player From the position (rising end position), it is slid downward in an arc and moved to the appearing position (falling end position) visible from the player side, and the rotary connecting member 3630 is rotated to make the back four corners second decoration The back four corner second decoration 3363 attached to the base 3631 and the back four corners second decoration base 3631 is rotated (turned) (FIG. 172 (H))

  Then, after the peripheral control MPU displays the mode in which the main character 1500a has won (FIG. 172 (I)), the peripheral control MPU executes the effect display (big hit effect; round effect display etc.) of the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. . As described above, even if the big hit gaming state is started before the production of the battle effect short is completed, the peripheral control MPU continues the continuation of the effect of the battle effect short and executes the operation according to the operation of the upper dish effect button 257 By making the back decoration unit 3550 appear, it is made to proceed in the direction in which the effects of the battle effect short are completed (FIG. 172 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the upper plate effect button 257 to cause the back and forth back rotating ornament unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. As described above, since the player can complete the battle production short presentation according to the operation of the upper dish production button 257 by the player, the player's intention can be reflected in the production, and a sense of satisfaction or a sense of achievement can be obtained. It is possible to execute an attraction more attractive than conventional gaming machines. As shown in FIG. 169, the effective period of the upper dish effect button 257 is continued until one round of the big hit gaming state is ended, but the upper dish effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period. Even if the back-to-back rotary ornament unit 3550 may be exposed after the effective period elapses, if the upper dish effect button 257 is not operated within the effective period, the back-to-back rotary ornament is The mode in which the main character 1500a has won may be displayed without causing the unit 3550 to appear.

  Further, in this example, the player is notified of becoming a big hit in the middle of the battle production and control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the continuation of the battle production is executed during execution of the big hit gaming state and the production result is displayed. In addition to advancing the start timing of the big hit gaming state originally started after executing all the battle effects, and shortening the variation time of the battle effects executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, per unit time It is suppressed that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is reduced. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (which varies depending on the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect short. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period for executing the effect to be executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is fluctuated, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, and control of the jackpot gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it may be half or more of the whole period) effects are executed during the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state The production period of the battle production short performed before control is 12 seconds, while the production period of the battle production short performed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 Depending on the

  Thus, the period (period executed as a big hit effect) during the big hit game state of all the production periods required to execute the battle effect short is a period (variation time) executed before the start of the big hit game state By making it longer than), the time required for the variable display can be reduced, and reduction in the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time can be suppressed. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state, after opening the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower The opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when the game ball is detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that nine winning balls have been won in the large winning opening 2005) multiple times (4 in this example) In order to execute the game once or 16 times, a period of a certain period or more is always required from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display effect (the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol in this case) before the start of the big hit gaming state among a part of all the effects of the battle production short. The remaining effect is executed as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, and the production period of the battle effect short which is executed as a variable display effect before the start of the big hit gaming state. The fluctuation time of the battle effect short is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short which is executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the operating handle 504 is operated to battle the big hit gaming state execution period, which only had to win the game ball in the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005). Performs a part of the effects of the production short, and makes all the effects of the battle production short fluctuate while displaying the production of the battle production short until the end without being terminated halfway before the start of the big hit gaming state The variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol in this case) is started because the variation time of the battle effect short can be shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared to when executed during the variation display of the second special symbol as the effect. It is possible to shorten the period from the end to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and by changing the fluctuation time, the number of times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol per unit time Since possible to prevent the reduction may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. Also, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the contents of the effect. The effect can be executed to reduce the fluctuation time, and a decrease in the game interest due to simplification of the effect content can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described example, an effect (a button effect) for requesting a button operation after determination that a big hit is determined is performed, and a back decoration is rotated based on the upper tray effect button 257 being operated within the effective period. The body unit 3550 is moved from the retracted position which can not be visually recognized from the player side to the appearance position which can be visually recognized. In other words, the player is notified in advance that the player has decided that the jackpot will be determined, and the player operates the upper dish effect button 257 within the effective period to ensure that the back decoration unit 3550 appears. The button effect is being executed while being grasped. Usually, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is determined, and when the result of the variable display is lost, the back dish rotation is performed even if the upper tray effect button 257 is operated within the effective period. It is set such that the possibility of causing the decoration unit 3550 to appear from the retracted position to the appearance position is low, and the upper tray effect button 257 is operated within the effective period when the result of the variable display is a big hit. The lower rear rotational ornament unit 3550 is set to have a high possibility of appearing from the retracted position to the appearance position.

  In addition, as described above, since the big hit probability at low probability is set to 1 in 400, and the big hit probability at high probability is set to 1 in 40, most of the fluctuation display to be executed loses display results. When the button effect is performed, even if the upper dish effect button 257 is operated, there is a low possibility that the back and back rotary ornament unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position. As described above, even if the upper dish effect button 257 is operated when the button effect is executed, the player feels stressed when the back and back turning decorative unit 3550 is not appeared from the retreat position to the appearance position. In addition, there is a possibility that when the button effect is executed, the game interest may be reduced since the possibility that the back decoration back rotary ornament unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position is low even if the upper dish effect button 257 is operated. The

  In this example, when it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit as described above, the button effect is executed, and the upper dish effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the back bottom back spin decoration unit 3550 is always from the retracted position In order to execute the button effect in a state in which the player has grasped in advance that it will appear at the appearance position, the upper plate effect is provided to release the stress accumulated by the button effect executed before it is decided that the big hit will be made. The button 257 can be operated. In addition, since it is possible to operate the upper dish effect button 257 in a state where attention is paid to surrounding players by having determined to be a big hit, and the back and back turning decorative unit 3550 can be made to appear, a sense of superiority is obtained. And can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170 and FIG. 171 (A) to FIG. 171 (D), FIG. 171 (E '), FIG. 172 and FIG. explain. In addition, since the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the effect similar to the effect executed based on the change pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short for the overlapping portion Will be replaced with battle production long, and only the part different from the battle production short production will be described below.

  171 (A) to 171 (D) by the peripheral control MPU based on the reception of the judgment result command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long) from the main control MPU If the display screen of the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is gradually brightened to make only the enemy character 1500b float up (FIG. 171 (E ')), an attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed. As shown in FIG. 170, the attack by the enemy character 1500b is performed while the second special symbol is variably displayed.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit in this example) continuing the high probability time short state and it is instructed to execute the variation pattern of battle production long by the variation pattern command In this case, the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ′)) and the reduced size is displayed on the lower left portion of the central liquid crystal display 1500. -The player is notified of becoming a big hit by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the right in the big hit mode (big hit symbol) and displaying "Avoid attack! Big hit confirmed!" (FIG. 173 (G ')). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (F) to 172 (I) are executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 170, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the central liquid crystal display 1500. The big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at the timing of the battle effect that the main character 1500a agrees and avoids the attack of the enemy character 1500b, and the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. The main control MPU starts open control of the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) based on the stop display.

  On the other hand, the judgment result notification command received indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends the high probability time short state and the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the battle production long by the fluctuation pattern command If the peripheral control MPU displays a mode in which the main character 1500a receives an attack of the enemy character 1500b (FIG. 173 (F ′ ′)), if the received determination result notification command is released. The left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in reduced size at the lower left part of central liquid crystal display 1500 are stopped and displayed in the form of disengaging (in this case, reach disappointing design), and the received judgment result notification command has high probability time short state If it is a big hit to finish the operation (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit), the lower left part of central liquid crystal display 1500 Stopping the display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the form of a big hit and displaying “Loss ...” notifies the player that the deviation or the high probability time saving state will be ended (see FIG. 173 (G '')). Thereafter, if the received determination result notification command is released, the process returns to FIG. 171 (A), and the central liquid crystal display device 1500 displays an aspect in which the main character 1500a is moving, and the received determination result notification command has high probability time If the big hit to end the state (in this example 4R normal big hit, 4R latent certain big hit) to notify that it will start the big hit gaming state, after executing the control of the big hit gaming state is returned to Figure 171 (A) main The mode in which the character 1500 a is moving is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500.

  A period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (which varies depending on the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long performed in the case of a big hit. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period for executing the effect to be executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is fluctuated, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, and control of the jackpot gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it may be half or more of the entire period) effects are executed during the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state While the production period of battle production long executed before control is 32 seconds, the production period of battle production long executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (operation timing of upper dish effect button 257 Depending on the

  As described above, even when performing a battle effect whose production period is longer than that of the battle effect short, a period executed during the big hit gaming state among all the effect periods required to execute the battle effect long (execute as a big hit effect The time required for the fluctuation display can be reduced by making the time period) longer than the period (variation time) executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, and the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols per unit time can be reduced. Can be deterred. That is, the central liquid crystal display device 1500 in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display effect (the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol in this case) before the start of the big hit gaming state among a part of all the effects of battle production long. While performing the remaining effects as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, and performing the remaining effects as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, the production period of the battle effect long performed as a variable display effect before the big hit gaming state starts, The fluctuation time of the battle production long is set so as to be relatively shorter than the production period of the battle production long executed as the big hit production after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the operating handle 504 is operated to battle the big hit gaming state execution period, which only had to win the game ball in the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005). A part of the production of the production long is executed, and all the production of the battle production long is performed until the end without ending all the production of the battle production long, but the variation of the second special symbol as the variation display production of all the production of the battle production long The variation time of the battle effect long is reduced by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared to the case of executing during display, and the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started and then the big hit gaming state is ended. Period can be shortened, and it is possible to suppress reduction in the number of times of display of fluctuation of special symbols per unit time by shortening fluctuation time, so the big hit judgment process The execution opportunities may be increased. Also, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the contents of the effect. The effect can be executed to reduce the fluctuation time, and a decrease in the game interest due to simplification of the effect content can be suppressed.

  In addition, it takes 65 seconds as the time required to execute all the effects of the battle production long which is executed when it becomes a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends the high probability time reduction state. It is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long executed when the big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) to end the out-of-date or high probability time-short state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after displaying the mode that the main character 1500a receives because the battle effect long can not be avoided and the attack of the enemy character 1500b can not be avoided, the main character 1500a is resurrected to perform an effect of defeating the enemy character 1500b. In this case, when the main character 1500a is restored, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after the control of the big hit gaming state is started, effects for defeating the enemy character 1500b (for example, effects of FIG. 172 (F) to FIG. 172 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect to be executed before the start of the big hit gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect played during the big hit gaming state, but even in this case at least all Since the effect period can be shortened as compared with the case where the effect of is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the number of times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol per unit time.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In the above example, although what is performed during the high probability time reduction state is shown, the effect period is shortened compared to the case where all the effects performed in connection with the variable display are performed before the start of the big hit gaming state It is not limited to the high probability time short state as long as the control is performed, and the low probability short time state (so-called normal state), the low probability time short state (so-called short time state), the high probability short time state, the high probability time short state It may be carried out in any one or any combination (or all) of (a so-called probability change state). In addition, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed also in cases other than the high probability time reduction state, the appearance frequency and the jackpot expectation of the effect may be made different for each gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state (high probability non-time short state, low probability non-time short state), the appearance frequency is lower than that in the time short state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) You may increase the selection ratio of the long version (battle production long) of the battle production in the non-time-shortening state when becoming a big hit, and increase the selection ratio of the short version (battle production short) in the battle-time state In the time saving state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced.

  Also, as described above, in the fluctuation pattern that is a big hit continuing the high probability time reduction state among the battle production short and the battle production long, the button production is executed during the big hit gaming state, but the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 Accordingly, the contents of the jackpot effect to be executed after the end of the battle effect may be made different. For example, when a button effect is executed, it is set as an effective period of the upper dish effect button 257 until a predetermined round (for example, three rounds) of the big hit gaming state is finished, and it is set in an early round (for example, When the dish effect button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects (such as a moving image) which end before the remaining rounds of the big hit gaming state are executed, and the upper dish effect is performed in a late round (for example, 3 rounds) When the button 257 is operated, a series of big hit effects may be ended halfway when the remaining rounds of the big hit gaming state are performed while executing the same effect. As described above, when the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 is late, since the big hit effect is terminated halfway, the upper dish effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing.

  In addition, regardless of the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 as described above, while executing the common big hit effect, depending on the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 is executed until the big hit effect is completed or it ends on the way The effect may be different depending on the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257. For example, when the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 is early, the player is enjoyed By displaying an effect that makes the player uncomfortable when the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 is late while displaying such an effect, the upper dish effect button 257 is operated at an earlier timing. It is also possible that the upper plate effect button 257 is operated (round, elapsed time, by the time the upper plate effect button 257 is operated). It is executed as a big hit effect by making the type of the big hit effect that is executed after the end of the battle effect different according to the winning opening (the number of gaming balls that entered the upper large winning opening 2006 or the lower large winning opening 2005). Alternatively, the player may operate the upper dish effect button 257 at a timing determined by the player himself while considering the type of the game to complete the battle effect. As described above, by making the subsequent development different according to the timing at which the upper dish effect button 257 is operated, the player is made to think about the timing at which the upper dish effect button 257 is operated, and the game in the big hit gaming state is enjoyed. Because it can be eliminated, it is possible to execute a more attractive presentation than the big hit presentation being performed in the conventional big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the aspect of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257. For example, the operation timing of the upper plate effect button 257 (round, elapsed time, until the upper plate effect button 257 is operated) The effect display (for example, the back) when making the back and forth back spin decoration unit 3550 appear as the large winning opening (the number of gaming balls entered the upper large winning opening 2006 or the lower large winning opening 2005, etc.) is earlier or later When a flame is displayed around the lower back spin decoration unit 3550, the size and color of the flame may be made flashy. As the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257 is earlier, the upper dish effect button 257 can be operated at an earlier timing by flashing the effect display when making the back decoration back rotary ornament unit 3550 appear, and the upper dish effect As the operation timing of the button 257 is later, it is possible to operate the upper dish effect button 257 at a later timing by making the effect display when making the back and back turning decorative unit 3550 appear more flashy. As described above, it is possible to guide the player to operate the upper dish effect button 257 at a predetermined timing by appropriately setting the effect.

  Also, depending on the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) until the upper dish effect button 257 is operated as the operation timing of the upper dish effect button 257. When different aspects of the effects (battle effect, big hit effect, or both), the big winning opening (the big win in all the big hit gaming states executed after starting the control of high probability time short state) It may be made to change according to the number of game balls which entered the mouth 2006 or the lower large winning prize opening 2005). In this case, it is possible to make the aspect of the effect different as the number of times of the big hit gaming state executed in the high probability time short state increases, so the player by the aspect of the effect executed according to the number of the big hit gaming state Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above example, when the button effect is executed and the upper dish effect button 257 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that point and the back bottom back spin decoration unit 3550 In the example, it is configured to appear only once, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is a case where the back decoration back rotation ornament unit 3550 appears, it does not end the validity period, and if it is within the validity period The back decoration back rotation decoration unit 3550 may be made to appear by operating the upper dish effect button 257 again after the rotation decoration unit 3550 is retracted, or a predetermined round in the big hit gaming state (all rounds If you operate the upper dish effect button 257 in a specific round (for example, until the end of 10 rounds, odd round, etc.), the back and back rotation decoration The unit 3550 may be made to appear, which further enhances the joy of being a big hit, and becomes a big hit by the appearance of the back and forth rotating decorative unit 3550 by the operation of the upper plate effect button 257. You can appeal to other people and give a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above-described example, not only a big hit but also a battle effect (battle production short, battle production long) can be executed even in the case of losing, but it becomes a big hit during high probability time reduction state The variation pattern of the battle effect may be executed only in the case, and the battle effect may not be executed when it becomes a loss. By configuring in this way, when a battle effect is executed, it always becomes a big hit, so it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin and at the same time the control of the big hit gaming state is started or the type of big hit (4R Big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) can be made to pay attention.

  In addition, while the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends high probability time short state with the decision result notification command while high probability time short state is indicated, battle production (battle production short, battle production) When a change pattern of "long" is instructed, the control of the big hit gaming state is started after the end of the battle effect, but in the 4R big hit gaming state executed in this case, compared to the 16 R big hit gaming state Since the period required from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state is short, even if it is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol as a variable display effect until the end of the battle production special symbol (this In this case, the special symbol (in this case, compared to the period from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol) to the end of the 16 big hit gaming state It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[9. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 174 to FIG. FIG. 174 is a front view of the gaming board obtained by cutting the front component and the front unit substantially at the center in the front-rear direction in the gaming area. FIG. 175 (a) is an enlarged front view showing the right part in the game area in FIG. 174, and FIG. 175 (b) is a sectional view taken along line H-H in FIG. It is. Further, FIG. 176 is an explanatory view showing the vicinity of the upper winning prize opening in FIG. 174 in an enlarged manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the operation handle 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the upper left side or the right side of the center character 2500 which divides the game area 5a left and right according to the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 504, and can be hit harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nail By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The game ball driven to the upper part of the center character 2500 by the ball launcher 680 hitting the game ball with a hitting strength less than the predetermined hitting strength according to the turning angle of the operation handle 504, The outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 enters the left side in a front view than the highest position. The gaming ball that has entered the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 is the left side of the center character 2500 while the gaming balls are in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails not shown. Will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500, the center ball 2500 of the center character 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521 It is supplied to the left end of the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 roll back and forth on the stage 2530 sideways, and side guide grooves 2532 formed on both sides in the left-right direction center in the game area 5a When it is discharged from the front, the area above the starting opening unit 2100 will flow down below the stage 2530 in the gaming area 5a. Thereby, there is a possibility that the game ball may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released forward from the central guiding groove 2531 at the center in the left-right direction in the playing area 5a of the stage 2530, the starting opening unit 2100 opening immediately below the central guiding groove 2531 Is accepted with high probability in the first starting opening 2002 of the When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board and the payout control board.

  By the way, when the game ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the game is performed under the center character 2500 by a plurality of obstacle nails and the first shelf 2201a of the side unit 2200. There is a possibility of being guided toward the center in the left-right direction in the area 5a and being accepted by the general winning a prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, and the like arranged on the downstream side. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board and the payout control board.

  In addition, the gaming ball which has flowed to the left of the center character 2500 does not flow to the side of the attacker unit 2300 due to the lower side of the center character 2500 extending between the start opening unit 2100 and the attack unit 2300. It is not accepted by the general winning a prize opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the lower large winning a prize opening 2005 and the like of the attacker unit 2300. The starting opening unit 2100 is provided with a horizontally elongated rectangular fake portion 2105a similar to the lower opening winning prize opening door member 2352 for opening and closing the lower opening winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2300 below the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to have an illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening like a conventional pachinko machine.

  On the other hand, according to the turning angle of the operation handle 504, the ball launcher 680 is struck at the top of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a by striking with a strike strength of a predetermined strike strength or more. The game ball enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 (is driven). The gaming ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 passes from the upper right entrance through the upper gaming space 2541 and the right passage 2542 to the lower right exit 2543 It is discharged right above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2300. As a result, the gaming ball which has been driven to flow down the right side of the center character 2500 (right-handed) passes through the gate portion 2003 with extremely high probability. The gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2003 flows downward on the shelf member 2303 through the front of the second start port 2004 and rolls on the shelf member 2303 to the left in front view, and then the front surface of the shelf member 2303 It is emitted downward from the left end of the eye. The game balls released from the shelf member 2303 flow downward on the lower right rail 1005 through the front of the lower large winning opening 2005, roll on the lower right rail 1005 to the left in a front view, and play the game from the out port 1111 It is discharged out of the area 5a.

  When the gaming ball discharged from the lower right outlet 2543 flows down the left side of the gate portion 2003 in a front view, the second winning opening 2004 through the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 and the guiding portion 2302 b of the starting opening front member 2302 Or, the lower prize winning opening 2005 may be accepted. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down on the right side of the gate portion 2003 in a front view, the game ball flows down onto the lower right rail 1005 and is discharged from the out port 1111 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001 Ru.

  Therefore, when the game ball passes the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 while the lower large winning opening 2005 is open, the lower large winning opening 2005 is accepted with high probability.

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2305, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board, and when the lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "normal hit", the second starting opening door member 2323 Is advanced for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 3 seconds) to open the second starting port 2004. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the front of the second start opening 2004 at the timing when the second start opening door member 2323 moves forward and is in the open state, the flow direction changes to the rear by the second start opening door member 2323 It will be accepted by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 through the main control board and the payout control board.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 1 to 10 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "middle") advantageous to the player on the main control board. A lottery of special lottery results is generated to generate "peri", "small perch", "per probability change", "per time reduction", etc.). Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player for a predetermined time (for example, 5 to 360 seconds). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “ There are probability change (probability change), "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "time change short", "time change no short", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state Either the lower winning prize opening door member 2352 of the attacker unit 2300 or the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 of the center role 2500 opens and closes in the opening / closing pattern according to the drawing result of the special lottery. It becomes possible to allow the game ball to be accepted to the winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006. When the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 is in the open state, and the gaming ball is received in the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006, a predetermined number from the payout device 830 by the main control board and the payout board For example, ten or thirteen game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the lower large winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550 is being opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 can receive many game balls. A game ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", the lower large winning opening door 2352 or the upper large winning opening door 2550 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed in the state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or lower after the lower large winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550 is opened. If any of the conditions for receiving a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls to the large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 is satisfied, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 or the upper large winning opening door member 2550 The opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) with the closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, if "15R big hit" for 15 rounds, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated repeatedly.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the central liquid crystal display device 1500. In the function display unit 1400, the special control result is directly controlled by the main control board to give an indication of the special lottery result. Suggestion of special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) makes a plurality of LEDs blink on and off repeatedly for a predetermined time, and then lights on Suggest a special lottery result by the combination of

  On the other hand, in the central liquid crystal display device 1500, based on the control signal from the main control board, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 is displayed by changing each symbol row while displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols side by side in the horizontal direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows to be stopped and displayed become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500, and the lottery is made. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)) and the time which suggests the special lottery result in the central liquid crystal display device 1500 (the symbol row fluctuates, and the finalized image The time until the is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the central liquid crystal display device 1500, according to the drawn special lottery result, the on-surface movable effect unit 2560, the out-of-table movable effect Unit 2570, back-up movable effect unit 3100, back-front movable effect unit 3200, back-right movable effect unit 3300, back-left movable effect unit 3400, back-back movable effect unit 3500, back four corner movable effect unit 3600, etc. The movable effect is appropriately performed to perform the player effect, and the player can be entertained even by the movable effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it becomes possible to receive the game ball to the upper large winning opening 2006, the back right rotation decoration 3310 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is rotated. When the third decorative surface 3310c is directed to the front (front), the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guiding path 2553 through which the gaming balls received in the upper large winning opening 2006 flow and the back right ball inlet 3320 coincide. State (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the game ball is received in the upper large winning opening 2006, the ball enters into the back right ball entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guiding path 2553, and the ball guiding member disposed in the back right rendering space 3321 Due to 3322, it flows down while rotating a plurality of times (here, 8 times) in a spiral around an axis extending up and down in the back right rendering space 3321 (see FIG. 175A).

  As a result, the gaming balls received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 can be made to flow spirally in the back right rendering space 3321. Therefore, the gaming balls received in the upper winning prize opening 2006 can be surely viewed by the player. As well as being able to increase the feeling of expectation for the payout of gaming balls by accepting the gaming balls to the large winning opening 2006, the player can be entertained by the gaming balls flowing down in a spiral, and it is interesting Can be suppressed. In addition, since the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500, the gaming ball flows down the ball guiding member 3322 to the player who is paying attention to the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500. You can easily recognize what you are doing. In this example, the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed adjacent to the central liquid crystal display device 1500. However, a part or all of the ball guiding member 3322 is disposed so as to overlap with the central liquid crystal display device 1500 The guiding member 3322 may easily recognize that the gaming ball is flowing down. Further, in this case, the ball guiding member 3322 can be formed of a transparent member that allows the back to be viewed, so that the viewing of the effect image displayed on the central liquid crystal display device 1500 can be prevented.

  When the upper large winning opening 2006 is in the open state, the rear discharge port 2554 of the rear guiding path 2553 is the first decorative surface 3310a when the back decoration other than the third decorative surface 3310c is facing forward in the back right rotation decorative body 3310. And the game ball received by the upper large winning opening 2006 enters the escape passage 2555 branched near the rear end of the rear guide passage 2553 and is released because it is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the second decorative surface 3310 b. It is discharged downward through the passage 2555. By this, when the upper large winning a prize opening 2006 becomes acceptable, the effect using the back right effect space 3321 of the back right movable effect unit 3300 is performed, or the effect not using the back right effect space 3321 is performed. It is possible to present a variety of variations to the player and entertain them. In addition, even if the back right rotation decorative body 3310 can not turn the third decorative surface 3310 c forward for any reason, the gaming ball accepted by the upper winning prize opening 2006 is stuck in the rear guiding path 2553. Can continue the game without any problems.

[10. High-speed digestion of the jackpot game]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to digest a predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game in a short time than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the gaming area 5a. The details will be described below.

  As described above, when the ball launcher 680 strikes the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a with a strike strength equal to or greater than a predetermined strike strength, the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center finish 2500 The gaming ball that has entered the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface abuts on the stopper 1006 and its momentum is weakened, and then enters the upper gaming space 2541 from the upper right entrance.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 176, since the upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, the gaming ball whose contact is dampened with the stopper 1006 is turned by the upper right entrance The movement direction is restricted and it will drop directly below.

  Then, with the upper large winning opening 2006 open, by making the upper end of the upper large winning opening door member 2550 higher than the lower end, the gaming ball in contact with the upper large winning opening door member 2550 can be raised with extremely high probability. Not only is it accepted in the big winning opening 2006, but also the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 is turned so that the upper end of the upper big winning opening door member 2550 is on the right in front view than the upper right entrance.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, no obstacle nail is implanted in the upper game space 2541. Therefore, the game balls dropped from the upper right entrance contact the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 with extremely high probability. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the right side of the outer circumferential surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 and dropped from the upper right entrance while the upper large winning opening 2006 is open is extremely It is accepted with a high probability in the top prize winning opening 2006.

  As described above, in order to arrange the upper large winning opening 2006 near the upper right end of the game area 5a, the game area 5a is driven more than the conventional gaming machine in which the large winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a. The moving distance until the game ball is received by the upper prize winning opening 2006 is shortened, and the game ball entering the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center character 2500 is extremely In order to receive the game into the upper prize winning opening 2006 with high probability, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball firing device 680 strikes the gaming ball into the game area 5a to when the gaming ball is received by the upper big winning opening 2006. As a result, it is possible to digest the predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game in a short time than the conventional gaming machine in which the big winning opening is arranged near the lower end of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game ball that is placed at the upper end of the game area 5a near the upper right end of the game area 5a and is hit with a hitting strength of a predetermined hitting strength or more by the ball launching device 680 Since it is possible to roll along the inside of the outer rail 1001 and enter the upper large winning opening 2006 without coming into contact with obstacles such as obstacle nails until it comes into contact, the game ball that has been driven must be Since the ball rolls at a constant speed or more, the period from when at least the ball launcher 680 strikes the gaming ball into the gaming area 5a to when the gaming ball abuts against the stopper 1006 can be shortened. That is, when the game ball is hit with a hitting strength of less than a predetermined hitting strength, the ball launching device 680 has a game area compared to when it is possible to enter the upper large winning opening 2006 It is possible to shorten the period from when the game ball is hit into 5a to when the game ball is received in the upper large winning opening 2006.

  In other words, when the game ball is hit by the ball launcher 680 with a hitting strength less than the predetermined hitting strength, the game ball is placed by the ball launching device 680 with the upper large winning opening 2006 arranged near the upper left end As compared with the case where it is configured to be able to enter the upper large winning opening 2006, the upper large winning opening 2006 is disposed near the upper right end of the game area 5a and the ball launcher 680 has a predetermined hitting strength or more Ball rolling device 680 can be made faster by configuring the game ball to be able to enter the upper large winning opening 2006 when the game ball is hit with a shot strength of It is possible to shorten the period from when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a to when the game ball is accepted in the large winning opening 2006, and it is possible to digest the predetermined number of rounds of the big hit game in a short time .

  In addition, since the ball launcher 680 is designed to hit one game ball every about 0.6 seconds, it takes six seconds to hit, for example, ten game balls. In addition, as described above, the game ball hit with a hitting strength greater than a predetermined hitting strength by the ball launching device 680 should be in contact with an obstacle such as an obstacle nail until it abuts on the stopping part 1006. In order to roll along the inner side of the outer rail 1001, the ball launcher 680 drives the gaming ball with a hitting strength equal to or greater than a predetermined hitting strength and enters the game area 5a before winning a big prize. The period until it is received in the mouth 2006 is very slight (about one second).

  That is, the period from when the upper winning opening door member 2550 is opened in one round of the big hit game to when 10 gaming balls are received by the upper opening winning hole 2006 is about half compared to the conventional gaming machine The period is about 7 to 8 seconds, and the interval period between rounds (period from closing the upper large winning opening 2006 to opening it again) is shorter than that of a conventional gaming machine (about 2.0 seconds). Since it is about 0.6 seconds, if it is a big hit game of 15 rounds, it will be finished in about 113.4 seconds-128.4 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the time required for a big hit game can be shortened compared to the conventional game machine, so the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are executed per unit time. The number of times the variable display is performed (the number of variable display) of the possible symbols (the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display, the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display) It is possible to increase the number of game machines than gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress the decline in amusement by increasing the chance of occurrence of a big hit. In addition, since the execution period of the big hit game executed by the conventional game machine can be shortened to about half, it is possible to make the big hit game itself intriguing as well, and it is possible to suppress the decline in amusement of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the gaming ball received in the upper large winning opening 2006 enters the back right ball entrance 3320 from the back discharge port 2554 of the back guiding path 2553, and the back right presentation space The ball guiding member 3322 arranged in 3321 makes it flow downward while rotating a plurality of times (here eight times) in a spiral around an axis extending up and down in the back right rendering space 3321 (see FIG. 175A) ). The gaming balls flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 are fragmentarily visible from the player as shown in FIG. 175 (a). It takes about two seconds before the game ball flowing down the ball guiding member 3322 is discharged from the discharge port 3303a of the lower right base 3303 and becomes difficult to be recognized by the player. As described above, the period from the game ball being driven by the ball launcher 680 with a hitting strength of a predetermined hitting strength or more and entering the game area 5a to being accepted by the upper large winning opening 2006 is 1 Since it is about a second, the period from the game ball being accepted by the upper winning opening 2006 to the time it is accepted by the upper winning opening 2006 after the game ball is hit by the ball launching device 680 is the back lower right base 3303 It is shorter than a period until it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize from the discharge port 3303a.

  As described above, not only rolling of the gaming balls in the gaming area 5a to which the player pays attention, but also the gaming balls accepted in the large winning opening 2006 which are not paying attention normally are rolled in a complicated manner and discharged. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the game by extending the period until the game is received, and by being accepted by the upper prize winning opening 2006, the so-called dead game ball is effectively used to suppress the decline in the game entertaining be able to. In addition, since the period from the game ball being hit by the ball firing device 680 to being accepted by the upper large winning opening 2006 is short, the player hardly sees the hit game ball, and the game ball is smoothly hit. You may feel uneasy about what is being done, but the game balls will be shot smoothly by extending the period until the game balls received by the large winning opening 2006 are rolled in a complicated way and discharged. It is possible to make the player recognize that the player is relieved. In addition, a period from when the game ball is hit by the ball launcher 680 until it is accepted by the upper winning hole 2006, the outlet 3303a of the lower right base 3303 after the game ball is accepted by the upper winning hole 2006. By shortening the time from the time it takes to be discharged from the player to the point where it becomes difficult to see from the player, it becomes possible to make the player's attention turn to the gaming ball accepted by the upper winning hole 2006.

[11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is hit in the game area 5a to change the game state, the back up drive motor of the back up movable effect unit 3100 according to the changed game state. The 3103 rotates. When the back upper drive motor 3103 rotates, the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 attached to the unit base 3101 rotate together with the back upper drive motor 3103. Then, when the first transmission member 3107 is rotated to enter the first specific rotation range from one range end of the first specific rotation range, the rotation of the first transmission member 3107 is transmitted to the first power receiving member 3117 Thus, the first power receiving member 3117 is rotated. When the first member to be transferred 3117 rotates, the first movable base 3116 is opposed to the proximal end which is one of the ends of the first movable range extending in the direction parallel to the plane of the game panel 1100. That is, it slides from the retracted position of the upper end toward the first emerging position below. Since the back top decoration 3152 is attached to the first movable base 3116 via the second movable base 3119, the back top decoration 3152 moves downward with the slide of the first movable base 3116. It becomes. Thereafter, the first transmission member 3107 is rotated to reach the opposite range end of the first specific rotation range, and at the same time, the first movable base 3116 reaches the other end of the first movable range, that is, the falling end. Furthermore, when the first transmission member 3107 leaves the first specific rotation range, the first movable base 3116 stops moving at the lowering end. Although the second transmission member 3108 is rotating even while the first transmission member 3107 is rotating, the second transmission member 3108 is not within the second specific rotation range. Does not cause the second movable base 3119 to slide relative to the first movable base 3116.

  A second movable base drive member 3124 to which rotation from the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted is rotatably attached to the first movable base 3116. Since the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached to the rotation link member 3123 in the direction (second direction) in which the second transmission guide 3123 d extends, when the first movable base 3116 slides, The rotary link member 3123 and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotate so that the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, and the second movable base drive member 3124 rotates on the rotary link member 3123. The slide relative to the second direction. At this time, when the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated, the second movable base 3119 slides relative to the first movable base 3116 as much as the second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated, and the back top decoration 3152 is The second movable base 3119 moves a little in the moving direction of the second movable base 3119, but when the second direction becomes parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124 is stopped. The movement of the back decoration 3152 relative to the movable base 3116 also stops. Since the moving direction of the second movable base 3119 is the same vertical direction as the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, even if the second movable base 3119 slides slightly by the rotation of the second movable base drive member 3124, The player is not noticed, and the back decoration 3152 can be made to move without discomfort. In the first state, when the second direction is parallel to the moving direction of the first movable base 3116, the rotating link member 3123 and the second movable base driving member 3124 do not rotate, and the second movable base is not rotated. 3119 does not slide relatively.

  Subsequently, the first transmission member 3107 is separated from the first specific rotation range by the rotation of the back upper drive motor 3103, and the first transmission member 3107 and the second transmission member 3108 are further rotated, and the second transmission member 3108 is When one range end of the second specific rotation range enters the second specific rotation range, the rotation of the second transmission member 3108 is transmitted to the second driven member 3122 and the second driven member 3122 starts rotating. Do. When the second driven member 3122 is rotated, the rotational link member 3123 is moved to the second driven member 3122 via a portion slidably mounted in the extending direction (first direction) of the first transfer guide portion 3122e. Will revolve around the As the rotating link member 3123 revolves, the extending direction in the second direction tends to rotate. Then, when the second direction (rotational link member 3123) tries to rotate, the rotational link is reduced so that the reaction force from the portion to which the second movable base drive member 3124 is slidably attached in the second direction is reduced. The second movable base drive member 3124 is rotated while the member 3123 slides along the first direction and the second direction, and the rotation from the second transmission member 3108 can be performed by the second driven member 3122 and the rotation link. It can be transmitted to the second movable base drive member 3124 via the member 3123.

  By transmitting the rotation to the second movable base drive member 3124, the second movable base 3119 is connected to the first movable base 3116 from the base end (upper end) which is one of the two ends of the second movable range. It slides downward in the same direction as the movement direction of the first base 3116 toward the opposite tip (lower end) side. As a result, the back upper decoration 3152 attached to the second movable base 3119 also moves downward together with the second movable base 3119. Thereafter, at the same time as the second transmission member 3108 is rotated to reach the opposite range end of the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 is at the tip (second emerging position) opposite to the second movable range. When the second transfer member 3108 reaches the position and the second transfer member 3108 rotates away from the second specific rotation range, the second movable base 3119 stops moving at the tip of the second movable range.

  When the second movable base 3119 slides relative to the first movable base 3116, a rack on which the decorative body rotary gear 3120 rotatably attached to the second movable base 3119 is attached to the first movable base 3116 It moves while rotating along the rack gear 3115 a of the member 3115. Then, since the back upper decoration 3152 is attached to the decoration rotating gear 3120, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decoration 3152 rotates and moves downward with the second movable base 3119. It becomes.

  In this state, the reverse drive motor 3103 is reversely rotated to move the second movable base 3119 and the first movable base 3116, that is, the back upper decoration 3152 in the initial state, in the reverse direction to the above. Can be returned to

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 can be separately moved, movement to move in two steps is given to the back top decorative body 3152. It is possible to make the back surface decoration 3152 complex movements. In addition, as the movable effect of the back surface decoration body 3152, the pattern of the movable effect is diversified by moving only the first movable base 3116 or moving the second movable base 3119 after the first movable base 3116 is moved. Since the back-side decorative body 3152 can be made hard to get bored, it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the second movable base 3119 is slid, the back upper decorative body 3152 rotates downward and moves downward together with the second movable base 3119, thereby providing more colorful movement to the back upper decorative body 3152. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, since the first movable base 3116 and the second movable base 3119 are slid in the same vertical direction, and the back upper decorative body 3152 can be moved in the same direction by a longer distance, the back upper decorative body The impact of the movable effect by 3152 can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, after the rotation from the first transmission member 3107 is once transmitted to the first transmission member 3117, the first movable base 3116 is moved by the first transmission member 3117. The circumferential length of the first specific rotation range in the member 3107 can be amplified by the first power receiving member 3117, and the first movable range from the retracted position of the first movable base 3116 to the first appearance position can be made larger. The player can be entertained by the large up-back decoration 3152 which moves widely, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since it is possible to make the back top decoration body 3152 intricate movement with only one back top drive motor 3103, for example, another drive motor for moving the second movable base 3119 to the first movable base 3116 is to be provided. While the number of drive motors can be reduced compared to the case where the first movable base 3116 does not need to be equipped with a drive motor, the number of drive motors can be reduced, and the load for controlling the movable effect can be reduced. The load (weight) acting on one movable base 3116 can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide the first movable base 3116 with a drive motor for the second movable base 3119, it is possible to make the back top decoration 3152 larger (heavy) by the weight of the drive motor. The complex movement of the back decoration 3152 can increase the impact on the player, and the large back decoration 3152 makes a two-step complex movement to the player It can be made to think that there is a good thing, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Next, a second embodiment of the handle unit 500 described above will be described. FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the handle unit 500 (but the handle main body 502 is not shown) viewed from the upper right, which facilitates or assists the player's operation of turning the operation handle 504 (turning portion). Thus, the protrusion 504A protrudes from the operation handle 504. The protrusion 504A may be integral with or separate from the operation handle 504. The projecting portion 504A protrudes or extends outward in the radial direction from the circumferential surface of the operation handle 504, and is configured as a linear rod shape having a circular cross section. The operation handle 504 is rotatably supported relative to the handle device main body (main body base).

  An area (grip area) where the player can easily hold the palm or one or a plurality of fingers is set in a predetermined range from the base end to the tip of the protrusion 504A. An example of the protruding portion 504A is a rod-like body having a length that can be held by the palm of the hand of the player. When the player operates (holds) the grip area downward, the operation handle 504 rotates clockwise, and the game ball is launched onto the game area with a strength (propulsive force) corresponding to the rotation angle. The projecting portion 504A clearly protrudes in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the operating handle 504 more clearly than the sector-like projecting piece 504B of the operating handle 504A, and the projecting length of the projecting portion 504A is operated downward by the player. In this case, the tip of the projecting portion 504A is set to such an extent that it does not come in contact with the plane of the lower end of the game stand (the plane of the island on which the game stand is installed). By setting the total length of the projecting portion 504A in this manner, when the player operates the projecting portion 504A, the projecting portion 504A can abut on another member. An example suitable as another member is a box (so-called dollar box) for storing a large amount of gaming balls. When the player operates the projecting portion 504A downward, the projecting portion 504A rotates clockwise with the operation handle 504, and the edge on the clockwise side of the projecting portion 504A is on the upper end of the dollar box placed on the front end of the lower end of the game table Contact (see FIG. 178). When the protrusion 504A abuts on another member, the protrusion 504A is supported by the other member, so that it is easy to fix the rotational position of the operation handle 504A. That is, the adjustment of the emission intensity is not burdensome for the player. Therefore, even if the game is continued for a long time, fatigue of the player's arms can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to continue the game while putting the weight of the forearm of the player on the projecting portion 504A, and it is possible to suppress fatigue of the arm of the player.

  When the position of the dolly box is appropriately moved in the width direction of the game stand, the rotation angle of the operation handle 504 can be appropriately adjusted by changing the position where the projecting portion 504A abuts on the dolly box. FIG. 178 is a schematic view showing a positional relationship between the protrusion 504A and the upper end of the right side of the dollar box 510A when the protrusion 504A abuts on the upper end. Reference numeral 5000 indicates the initial position of the projecting portion 504A, that is, the position in the state where the projecting portion 504A is not operated by the player. In this state, when the player pushes the protrusion 504A in the clockwise direction, the protrusion 504A abuts on the right upper end 510A of the dollar box 512A at the position of the reference numeral 5002. Reference numeral 5002 indicates the position (first position) of the protrusion 504A in the case of weakly hitting the game ball to the left. If it is intended to launch the game ball with a stronger force than when the projecting portion 504A is in the first position, the dollar box 512A is moved to the left with respect to the gaming table, and the projecting portion 504A is The position is rotated clockwise to a second position indicated by reference numeral 5004 beyond the position. In the second position, the protrusion 504A can be fixed to the second position by bringing the protrusion 504A into contact with the upper end 510A of the dollar box 512A. The position of the dollar box 510A with which the projecting portion 504A abuts is not limited to the upper end 510A described above, and may be a predetermined end face, an end, or the like.

  In a state in which the protrusion 504A is in contact with the dollar box 512A, the stress for rotating the protrusion 504A is balanced by the repulsive force from the dollar box 512A, and the position of the protrusion 504A is maintained. That is, even if the player holds the protruding portion 504A and puts the weight of the forearm on the protruding portion 504A, the protruding portion 504A is supported by the dollar box 512A, so that the player resists the weight of the arm. However, fatigue of the arm portion is overwhelmingly suppressed as compared with the case where the outer peripheral portion of the operation handle 504 is directly grasped and operated. In addition, the projecting portion 504A can be fixed to the dollar box to fix the firing strength of the gaming ball. In addition, the player adjusts the position of the dollar box 512A because the protrusion 504A has a length that can abut the upper end of the dollar box 512A at the first position 5002 and the second position 5004 thereof. Thus, the player desirably sets the position of the protruding portion 504A in the range from the first position 5002 to the second position 5004 in the leftward strike of the game ball in the normal gaming state, and thereby desires to drive the game ball. It can be simply and easily adjusted to the strength of.

  When it is necessary to hit the gaming ball harder than when the projecting portion 504A is in the second position 5004, for example, the projecting is performed so that the dollar box 512A does not abut the projecting portion 504A in the right hitting gaming state described later It moves away from the part 504 in the left direction. As a result, the protruding portion 504A can further rotate in the clockwise direction than the second position 5004. The code | symbol 5006 of FIG. 178 is the maximum position which the protrusion part 504A can rotate clockwise. By the rotation angle of the operation handle 504 at this time, the gaming ball is hit to the gaming area with maximum strength. At this maximum position, as shown in FIG. 178, since the protrusion 504A is substantially along the direction of gravity, it is difficult to support the weight of the player's arm. However, as shown in FIG. 179, if the tip of the protrusion 504A extends to the vicinity even if it does not contact the flat surface 600A of the island, the player places the wrist 602A on the flat surface 600A and operates the protrusion 504A. can do. Therefore, as in the case where the projection 504A is between the first position 5002 and the second position 5004, the pivoting state of the operation handle 504 can be maintained while the weight of the forearm is supported.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 178, the protrusion 504A at the maximum position 5010 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the direction of gravity by extending the maximum position of the protrusion 504A to the vicinity 5010 of the initial position 5000. be able to. In this state, even if the protruding portion 504A does not abut against the dollar box 512A, while the protruding portion 504A is supported by the rotation inhibiting means of the main body base, while the game ball is hit with maximum strength (right-handed state) Since the further rotation of the protrusion 504A is suppressed, the player can easily maintain and fix the operation mode of the operation handle 504.

  Although the protrusion 504A is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle 504 as shown in FIG. 177, the operation handle 504 may be integrated with the handle cover 506 as shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 described above. . For example, the protrusion 504A is integrally formed at the center of the handle as a hemispherical casing. Since the fan-shaped projecting piece 504B as described above is not formed on the outer periphery of the handle 504, the pivoting of the handle 504 is mainly realized by the operation of the projecting portion 504A. Note that FIG. 180 shows a state in which the projecting portion 504A is in contact with the plane on the right edge side of the dollar box 512A in the normal gaming state in which the gaming ball is left struck in the gaming area with weak launch strength.

  In the above description, it has been described that the player rotates the operation handle 504 using the projecting portion 504A, but like the conventional gaming machine, the finger is used to move the fan-shaped projection piece 504B on the outer periphery of the operation handle 504. The operation handle 504 may be turned while holding the outer periphery of the operation handle 504 with a palm. Such a game form adopts a circulating system of game balls and is suitable for playing in a game arcade without using a dollar box. In this case, the projecting piece 504A may be detachable from the operating handle 504 so that the projecting piece 504A can be removed from the operating handle 504 so as not to interfere with the operation of the operating handle 504. One example of the attachment / detachment mechanism is a form in which the base of the protrusion 504A is screwed into a screw hole on the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle 504. Alternatively, the protrusion 504A may be provided with an expansion and contraction mechanism. When the player does not use the protrusion 504A for pivoting the operation handle 504, the player may remove the protrusion 504 from the operation handle 504, or may reduce the protrusion 504A by a telescopic mechanism. Further, the projecting portion 504A may be made tiltable toward the player in the direction orthogonal to the radial direction of the operation handle 504. By adopting such a configuration, when attempting to further rotate the projecting portion 504A from the second position 5004 in the clockwise direction, the projecting portion 504A is moved without tilting the projecting portion 504A so that the projecting portion 504A is not moved. Can be turned clockwise, the control handle 504 can be rotated clockwise.

  FIG. 181 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover 530A integrally formed with the protrusion 504A is engaged with the handle unit from the front side of the handle cover 506. FIG. The cover 530A has a configuration in which an engagement claw 560A that engages with the recess between the fan-shaped projecting pieces 504 of the operation handle 504 is added to the housing portion which covers the handle cover 506 of the handle unit 500 and accommodates the handle cover. ing. When the cover 530A is covered by the handle cover 506, the cover 530A is elastically deformed on the handle cover 506 and the operation handle 504 so as to be crimped so as not to be easily detached. In this state, when the player operates the protruding portion 504A of the cover 530A, the operation handle 504 also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the cover 530A. Thus, by making the cover 530A detachable from the handle unit 500, in the game mode using the dollar box, the cover 530A is attached to the handle unit 500, and conversely, in the game mode not using the dollar box The game may be played without using the cover 530A. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), in a part on the clockwise side of the circumferential surface of the projecting portion 504, a recessed area 504D to be a receptacle when coming into contact with a dollar box or the like is formed. . The recessed area 504D facilitates the contact between the protrusion 504A and the other member.

  In the embodiment described above, the protrusion 504A has been described as extending linearly in the radial direction of the operation handle 504, but even if the protrusion 504 is changed to extend non-linearly. Good. For example, FIG. 182 is a schematic view showing that the protrusion 504A has a form including one or more stepped portions. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the projection 504A and the operation handle 504. FIG. The projecting portion 504A has a form extending in the radial direction from the operation handle 504 while having a deflecting portion which is deflected in the rotational direction of the rotating portion in the middle, as an example of a non-linear shape. That is, the grip area of the protruding portion 504A is a straight portion 700A on the base end side, a stepped portion as a deflecting portion, and is constituted by a first stepped portion 700B and a second stepped portion 700C. Like the first stepped portion 700B and the second stepped portion 700C, the protruding portion 504A is deflected in the counterclockwise direction (offset) as it goes to the tip end side of the protruding portion 504A. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182, even when the height position of the finger at the time when the finger 702A is hooked on the protrusion 504A is the same (5030 of (2) and (3)), the finger 702A serves as a base of the protrusion 504A. In the state (1) where it is hung on the end side linear portion 700A (first position), the rotation angle of the operation handle 504 becomes a relatively small value, while the tip side of the protruding portion 504A, that is, the first position and deflection In the state (3) in which the second stepped portion 700C (second position) positioned in the direction away from the operation handle 504 via the unit (first stepped portion) is put in a finger (3), the rotation angle of the operation handle 504 is It will be a larger value. The former (2) corresponds to the case where the game ball is slightly hit to the left, and the latter (3) corresponds to the case where the game ball is strongly hit to the left.

  Therefore, the player changes the height in the vertical direction of the hand, as a mode for moving the finger in the longitudinal direction of the protruding portion 504A is added as a mode of pressing the protruding portion 504A as an operation form for the protruding portion 504A. It is possible to change the impact strength of the game ball by pressing any position in the longitudinal direction of the protruding portion 504A downward. In other words, in order to launch the game ball with a predetermined launch force from the launch drive device, the game ball is presented with a first position when the player operates the first position and a launch force stronger than the predetermined launch force. The height in the vertical direction of the second position when the second position is operated to fire is substantially the same. And, even when the protruding portion 504A is at the position of the maximum rotation angle (5006 of (3)), the tip end side of the protruding portion 504A is at a position shifted counterclockwise from the proximal end side of the protruding portion 504A. The tip side of the protrusion 504A can be brought into contact with the end of the dollar box 712A (3).

  Next, the relationship between the operation angle of the operation handle 504 provided with the projecting portion 504A and the emission intensity will be described. FIG. 184 corresponds to FIG. 178, and is a schematic view showing the relationship between the operating angle of the protruding portion 504A (the operating angle of the operation handle body 504B) and the emission intensity. (A) shows the initial position of the protrusion 504A and the emission intensity is zero, and (B) shows the emission intensity weak in the state where the protrusion 504A is rotated first (operation angle: θ1) The left-handed state is shown, and (C) shows that the projection intensity is in the strongly left-handed state when the protrusion 504A is rotated the second (operation angle: θ2), and (D) is the protrusion 504A. Shows that the launch intensity is in the right-handed start state in the third turn (operation angle: θ3), and (E) is the launch intensity in the state where the protrusion 504A is rotated fourth (operation angle: θ4) Indicates that the player is in the right-handed state (maximum). Therefore, (θ2−θ1) is the left hitting range, and (θ4−θ3) is the right hitting range. Due to this characteristic, the left hitting is started at the stage of the initial operation where the operation angle of the protrusion 504A is small, and most of the remaining operation angles in the protrusion are in the range of the right hitting.

  FIG. 185 is a characteristic diagram showing the relationship between the operating angle of the protrusion 504A and the firing intensity. The launch solenoid 682 of the ball launcher 680 is controlled based on this characteristic. In a conventional launcher in which the projection 504A is not attached to the operation handle 504, the operation angle of the operation handle and the emission intensity operate in proportion. In FIG. 185, 3000A indicates that the emission intensity changes proportionally to the maximum value (E) when the protrusion 504A changes to the maximum operable angle (θ4). Assuming that the operating angle of the protrusion 504A and the firing strength change due to such conventional characteristics, the operating angle at which the left hitting range ((B) to (C)) is realized shifts to the angle increasing side (3200 And the dollar box etc. may not be able to support the projection 504A. Therefore, the relationship between the operating angle of the protrusion 504 and the firing intensity is changed to one that causes a non-linear change. That is, from the initial position (A) of the protruding portion 504A to the left hitting start state (B), the rate of change of the operation angle-the firing intensity is increased so that the player can quickly hit the game ball left. Then, from the left strike weak state (B) to the left strike strong state (C), the operation angle-fired intensity is changed by the proportional coefficient with the rate of change suppressed to make it easy for the player to adjust the fire intensity. (3201).

  Next, the rate of change is increased from the left strike strength state (C) to the right strike start state (D) to allow the player to quickly shift to the right strike state. Then, from the right-handed start state (D) to the right-handed maximum firing intensity state (E), the change rate of operation angle-firing intensity is made substantially zero so that the player can maintain the right-handed situation during this time . Therefore, even if the protrusion 504A can be largely rotated (approximately 360 ° rotation) as shown in FIG. 178, the relationship between the operation angle and the firing intensity can be changed so that the player can easily play the game.

  On the other hand, it is difficult to further rotate the protruding portion 504A in a state where the protruding portion 504A is in contact with the end of the dollar box in the left-handed state of the gaming ball, and the right hitting suddenly becomes necessary. I can not cope. Therefore, a means for increasing the firing intensity without changing the operating angle of the protrusion 504A can be applied to the launcher. For example, a switch (potentiometer) that can be pushed in the radial direction of the protrusion is provided on the finger side of the protrusion 504A. When the player depresses the switch, an output is provided to the launcher that enables identification of the magnitude of the amount of depression. The launcher increases launch intensity based on the output value. Therefore, even when the protruding portion 504A is in contact with the end of the dollar box, the game ball can be hit to the right.

  The firing intensity may be changed depending on the number of fingers holding the protrusion 504A. For example, the finger area of the protrusion is divided into four touch areas, and the number of fingers attached to the protrusion is detected by the four touch detection units. FIG. 186 (A) shows a state in which the index finger 3100A and the middle finger 3102A of the player's right hand grip the projecting part. One of the four touch detection units (first touch detection unit 4000A) is turned on by the index finger 3100A, and the other touch detection unit (second touch detection unit 4000B) is turned on by the middle finger 3102A. It has become. At this time, the launch device maintains the left-handed state of the gaming ball by the output from the touch detection unit, and the protrusion abuts on the end of the dollar box. From this state, when the finger attached to the protrusion increases, the launcher detects an increase in the number of outputs from the touch detection unit. FIG. 186B shows a state in which the third touch detection unit 4000C is turned on by the ring finger 3100C and the fourth touch detection unit 4000D is turned on by the little finger 3100D. The launch device detects an increase in the number of output signals from the touch detection unit, and changes the launch intensity to the right strike state if it is a left strike state.

  In addition, the touch detection unit may be provided in the above-described step. As shown in FIG. 187, the first touch detection unit 3200A is provided in the first step, and the second touch detection unit 3200B is provided in the second step. The first touch detection unit is for weak left strike, and the second touch detection unit is for strong left strike. When the first finger 3202A is attached to the first touch detection unit 3200A, the launcher controls the launch intensity to the weak left strike state. When the second finger 3202B is attached to the second touch detection unit 3200B, the emission intensity is controlled to the strong left strike state. When the finger is attached to both touch detection units, the emission intensity is controlled to be hit to the right. As described above, since the firing strength can be changed in accordance with the manner of the finger gripping the projecting portion 504A, even in a state where the projecting portion 504A is in contact with another member such as a dollar box, it is possible to easily and reliably cope with right-handed game can do.

  In the above description, the dollar box has been exemplified as another member, but instead of the dollar box, a rod-like body 3250 may be perpendicularly projected from the outer frame of the gaming machine in the vicinity of the operation handle (FIG. 188). When the protruding portion 504A is rotated, the protruding portion 504A abuts on the rod-like body 3250, and the protruding portion 504A is supported by the game stand by restricting further rotation. FIG. 187 is a schematic view depicting the relationship between the protruding portion 504A and the rod-like body 3250 from the front of the game console. The rod-like body 3250 is formed in the vertical direction of the outer frame and can move up and down the guide hole 3230A. Reference numeral 3250A indicates that the rod-like body is at the top end of the guide hole. In a state where the protrusion 504A abuts on the uppermost rod 3250A, the operation angle of the protrusion is not large, and the launcher brings the launch strength to a weak left strike state. Reference numeral 3250B indicates that the rod-like body is at the lowermost end of the guide hole 3230A. In the state where the protrusion abuts on the lowermost rod 3250B, the operation angle of the protrusion is large, and the launcher brings the firing strength to the right. The emission intensity can be adjusted by moving the position of the rod in the guide hole in the range between the top end and the bottom end. Reference numeral 3250C indicates that the rod-like body is in the state of strong left-hand emission.

  The rod-like body can be moved up and down along the guide hole by connecting a motor (not shown) via a link mechanism. By locking the motor by the motor control mechanism, it is possible to maintain the position of the rod against the stress applied to the projection. Therefore, the rod-like member can support the weight of the forearm added to the protrusion. From this state, when the player strongly presses the projection, the motor control mechanism detects a change in torque via the link mechanism, releases the lock, and the motor moves the rod-like body. For example, when the rod-like body is at the uppermost end, the rod-like body is moved to the position of the left-handed state to lock the motor. When the rod-like body is in a strong left-handed state, the rod-like body is moved to the lowermost end to lock the motor. When the gaming state is in the right-handed state, the motor control mechanism may move the rod-like body to the lowermost end position even if the player does not press the projecting portion. And, when the right-handed state ends, the rod-like body may be similarly moved to the uppermost end. As described above, it is possible to play a game while bringing the projecting portion into contact with the other member even with a configuration other than the dollar box as the other member.

  In the above description, when the projection is in contact with the short end of the dollar box in the left striking state, the projection can not be rotated clockwise. This is the same even in the case of a rod-like body protruding from the outer frame. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189, the protrusion 504A is made rotatable relative to the operation handle main body 504B by a notch mechanism or the like. As shown in FIG. 189, when the protruding portion 504A is in a weak left-handed state (5002), the protruding portion 504A is counteracted with the handle main body 504B fixed by a palm or the like to maintain the current operating angle of the operation handle. When it is moved clockwise almost straight up (5006), the protrusion 504A is in a weak left-handed state at this position. When the protrusion 504A is rotated clockwise until it abuts on the other member 510 from this state, an increase in angle accompanying this rotation is added to the operation handle main body 504B having the operation angle in the left hitting weak state, and the protrusion At the stage where the portion 504A abuts on another member, it becomes right-handed. Therefore, even if the other members are not moved, the protrusion 504A can be made to be able to hit the right.

  Here, when the projection moves relative to the operation handle main body, it becomes much more difficult for the player to know at what level the emission intensity is based on the current position of the projection. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190, the operation handle main body 504B is provided with a scale 3400 for making the player understand the operation angle of the projection 504A (the operation angle when the projection is in contact with other members). Reference numeral 3400A is a specific scale indicating that it is a right-handed area. Reference numeral 3402 is a pointer indicating the relative position of the protrusion 504A with respect to the operation handle main body 504B. The pointer is at the position 3402B until the protrusion 504A is relatively rotated. Then, when the protrusion 504A is relatively rotated to the position of the specific scale 3400A, the pointer moves from the initial position 3402B to the specific scale 3402A. When the projecting portion is rotated clockwise from this state, the operation handle main body 504B is also rotated integrally with the projecting portion, and it becomes a right-handed game in a state where the projecting portion is in contact with other members. Therefore, the player can check the operating angle of the protrusion visually if the protrusion is relatively rotated at the stage when the right hitting game state occurs, and the player will be right hitting if the protrusion is brought into contact with other members. You will be able to understand that.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a handle unit 500 handle body 502 operation handle 504 game area 1000 front component 1100 game panel 1500 central liquid crystal display 3000 back unit 3010 back box 3010a opening 3100 back Upper movable effect unit 3101 Unit base 3103 Back upper drive motor (drive motor)
3104 Drive gear 3105 First driven gear 3106 Second driven gear 3107 First transmission member 3107a First transmission gear 3107b First transmission pin 3107c First lock projection 3107d First missing portion 3108 Second transmission member 3108a Second transmission gear 3108b second transmission pin 3108c second lock projection 3108d second notch 3115 rack member 3115a rack gear (decor body rack gear)
3116 first movable base 3117 first transmitted member 3117a first substrate portion 3117b first acting pin 3117c first transmitted main body portion 3117d first transmission slit 3117e first lock recess 3119 second movable base 3120 decorative body rotation gear 3122 Second Transmission Member 3122a Second Substrate 3122b Second Transmission Main Body 3122c Second Transmission Slit 3122d Second Lock Recess 3122e First Transmission Guide 3123 Rotating Link Member 3123a Link Body 3123b First Transmission Guide 3123d Second Transmission guide portion 3124 Second movable base drive member 3124a Second action pin 3124b Drive main body portion 3124c Second receiving guide portion 3125 Shaft member 3150 Back top decoration unit (decoration body)
3151 Decorative body base 3152 Back side decorative body (decorative body)

Claims (2)

A gaming machine including an outer frame and a main frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, wherein a game is performed using a game medium,
The outer frame is
A lower member including a slat provided on the lower part and on which the main body frame is placed with the main body frame closed with respect to the outer frame;
A hinge member provided on the left side of the outer frame and supporting the main body frame so as to be able to open and close;
Have at least
A game ball discharge area for discharging game balls is provided on the rear side of the curtain plate at a position retracted backward on the side where the hinge member is provided, and the back of the game ball discharge area is horizontally long With a standing wall formed on the
The upper end of the standing wall at a position retracted backward on the side where the hinge member is provided is a portion of the portion on which the main body frame of the curtain plate is placed is not present at the position where the standing wall is retracted backward To be higher than the top of the
On the side of the gaming ball discharge area, there is provided a flat plate portion to which the gaming ball is fed so that the gaming ball is not pinched by the main body frame and the standing wall portion when the main body frame is closed.
The game ball can be guided along the standing wall portion from the flat plate portion to the game ball discharge area,
A game machine characterized by comprising a return portion extending forward from an upper end of the standing wall portion. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the standing wall portion has a bending portion that bends in the front-rear direction halfway in the lateral direction.